Aws D14.4 2005

AWS D14.4/D14.
4M:2005
An American National Standard
Specification for
Welded Joints in
Machinery and
Equipment
Key Words —Classification, equipment, inspection AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005
and weld repair, joint design, An American National Standard
machinery
Approved by
American National Standards Institute
June 10, 2005
Specification for
Welded Joints in
Machinery and Equipment
3rd Edition
Supersedes ANSI/AWS D14.4-97
Prepared by
AWS D14 Committee on Machinery and Equipment
Under the Direction of

AWS Technical Activities Committee
Approved by
AWS Board of Directors
Abstract
This specification establishes common acceptance criteria for classifying and applying carbon and low-alloy steel
welded joints used in the manufacture of machines and equipment. It also covers weld joint design, workmanship, qual-
ity control requirements and procedures, welding operator and welding procedure qualification, weld joint inspection
(visual, radiographic, ultrasonic, magnetic particle, liquid penetrant), repair of weld defects, and heat treatment.
550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, Florida 33126

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005
Table of Contents
Page No.
Personnel......................................................................................................................................................................v
Foreword ....................................................................................................................................................................vii
List of Tables ..............................................................................................................................................................xii
List of Figures........................................................................................................................................................... xiii
1. Scope .....................................................................................................................................................................1
2. Normative References ...........................................................................................................................................1
3. Definitions.............................................................................................................................................................2
4. Classification of Welded Joints.............................................................................................................................3
4.1 Joint Classes ................................................................................................................................................3
4.2 Intermittent Welded Joints...........................................................................................................................3
4.3 Quality Control Requirements.....................................................................................................................3
5. Welded Joint Design .............................................................................................................................................3
5.1 Stresses in Weld Metal ................................................................................................................................3
5.2 Fatigue Stress Provisions.............................................................................................................................3
5.3 Combined Unit Stresses and Toughness Requirements ..............................................................................6
5.4 Filler Metals.................................................................................................................................................6
5.5 Lap Joints.....................................................................................................................................................6
5.6 Corner and T-Joints ...................................................................................................................................12
5.7 Prohibited Types of Joints and Welds in Dynamic Applications ..............................................................12
5.8 Combinations of Welds .............................................................................................................................15
5.9 Welds in Combination with Rivets and Bolts ...........................................................................................15
5.10 Fillet Weld Details.....................................................................................................................................15
5.11 Eccentricity of Connections.......................................................................................................................15
5.12 Connections or Splices in Tension and Compression Members ...............................................................16
5.13 Connections or Splices in Compression Members with Milled Joints ......................................................16
5.14 Connections of Components of Built-Up Members ..................................................................................16
5.15 Transition of Thicknesses or Widths at Butt Joints ...................................................................................16
5.16 Girders and Beams.....................................................................................................................................16
5.17 Effective Weld Areas, Lengths, and Throats.............................................................................................18
5.18 Fillers .........................................................................................................................................................20
5.19 Partial Joint Penetration Groove Weld Restrictions ..................................................................................20
5.20 Joint Qualification .....................................................................................................................................20
5.21 Details of Fillet Welds ...............................................................................................................................21
5.22 Details of Plug and Slot Welds..................................................................................................................21
5.23 Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds................................................................................................22
5.24 Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds.....................................................................................................24
6. Workmanship ......................................................................................................................................................24
6.1 General.......................................................................................................................................................24
6.2 Preparation of Materials ............................................................................................................................24
6.3 Assembly ...................................................................................................................................................25
ix
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005
Page No.
7. Qualification........................................................................................................................................................26
Part A—General Qualification Requirements ....................................................................................................26
7.1 Approved Procedures.................................................................................................................................26
7.2 Other Procedures .......................................................................................................................................26
7.3 Welders, Welding Operators, and Tack Welders ......................................................................................26
7.4 Qualification Responsibility ......................................................................................................................27
Part B—Welding Procedure Qualification .........................................................................................................27
7.5 General.......................................................................................................................................................27
7.6 Limitation of Variables..............................................................................................................................27
7.7 Types of Tests and Purposes......................................................................................................................30
7.8 Base Metal and Its Preparation ..................................................................................................................30
7.9 Position of Test Welds...............................................................................................................................31
7.10 Production of Test Samples .......................................................................................................................34
7.11 Test Specimens—Number, Type, and Preparation....................................................................................34
7.12 Method of Testing Specimens ...................................................................................................................35
7.13 Test Results Required ................................................................................................................................42
7.14 Records ......................................................................................................................................................45
7.15 Retests........................................................................................................................................................45
Part C—Welder Qualification.............................................................................................................................45
7.16 General.......................................................................................................................................................45
7.17 Qualification Tests Required .....................................................................................................................45
7.19 Groove Weld Plate Qualification Test for Plate of Unlimited Thickness .................................................46
7.20 Groove Weld Plate Qualification Test for Plate of Limited Thickness.....................................................46
7.21 Groove Weld Qualification Test for Butt Joints on Pipe or Square or Rectangular Tubing .....................47
7.22 Groove Weld Qualification Test for T-, Y-, or K-Connections on Pipe or Square or Rectangular
Tubing........................................................................................................................................................47
7.23 Fillet Weld Qualification Test ...................................................................................................................47
7.24 Positions of Test Welds .............................................................................................................................48
7.25 Base Metal .................................................................................................................................................49
7.26 Welding Procedure ....................................................................................................................................49
7.30 Retests........................................................................................................................................................56
7.31 Period of Effectiveness ..............................................................................................................................56
7.32 Records ......................................................................................................................................................56
Part D—Welding Operator Qualification...........................................................................................................56
7.33 General.......................................................................................................................................................56
7.36 Base Metal .................................................................................................................................................59
7.37 Welding Procedure ....................................................................................................................................59
7.40 Retests........................................................................................................................................................60
7.42 Records ......................................................................................................................................................60
Part E—Qualification of Tack Welders ..............................................................................................................60
7.43 General.......................................................................................................................................................60
x
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005
Page No.
7.46 Base Metal .................................................................................................................................................60
7.50 Retests........................................................................................................................................................61
7.52 Records ......................................................................................................................................................62
8. Inspection ............................................................................................................................................................62
8.1 Visual Inspection .......................................................................................................................................62
8.2 Radiographic Inspection ............................................................................................................................66
8.3 Ultrasonic Inspection .................................................................................................................................74
8.4 Magnetic Particle Inspection .....................................................................................................................85
8.5 Liquid Penetrant Inspection.......................................................................................................................87
9. Repair ..................................................................................................................................................................88
9.1 Weld Repairs .............................................................................................................................................88
9.2 Base Metal Repairs ....................................................................................................................................89
9.3 Repair Procedure .......................................................................................................................................90
10. Postweld Treatments ...........................................................................................................................................90
10.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................90
10.2 Thermal Residual Stress Reduction...........................................................................................................91
10.3 Peening ......................................................................................................................................................91
10.4 Vibratory Conditioning..............................................................................................................................92
Mandatory Annex .......................................................................................................................................................93
Annex I—Prequalified Weld Joints ............................................................................................................................93
Nonmandatory Annexes............................................................................................................................................104
Annex A—Guidelines for Preparation of Technical Inquiries for AWS Technical Committees ..............................113
Annex B—Bibliography ............................................................................................................................................115
List of AWS Documents on Machinery and Equipment............................................................................................117
xi
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005
List of Tables
Table Page No.
1 Weld Inspection Requirements ......................................................................................................................6
2 Maximum Allowable Stress in Weld Metal...................................................................................................9
3 Stress Categories to Determine the Allowable Stress Range in Tables 4 and 5 ..........................................10
4 Allowable Fatigue Stress Range for Redundant Load Path Structures........................................................13
5 Allowable Fatigue Stress Range for Non-Redundant Load Path Structures ...............................................14
6 Base Metal and Filler Metal Relationship....................................................................................................15
7 Effective Weld Sizes of Flare Groove Welds ..............................................................................................19
8 Minimum Fillet Weld Size for Prequalified Joints ......................................................................................23
9 Minimum Size of Full Strength Double Fillet Welds ..................................................................................23
10 Minimum Weld Size for Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds...............................................................24
11 Maximum Allowable Chemical Composition Limits for Steels Prequalified for Welding.........................27
12 Procedure Qualification—Type and Position Limitations...........................................................................34
13 Procedure Qualification—Number and Type of Test Specimens Required and Range of Thickness
Qualified for Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds ............................................................................39
14 Procedure Qualification—Number and Type of Test Specimens Required and Range of Thickness
Qualified for Fillet Welds ............................................................................................................................42
15 Welder and Welding Operator Qualification—Type and Position Limitations ..........................................54
16 Welder and Welding Operator Qualification—Number and Type of Specimens Required and
Range of Thickness Qualified......................................................................................................................55
17 Acceptance Criteria for Visual Inspection ...................................................................................................63
18 Standard Hole-Type and Wire Image Quality Indicator Requirements.......................................................67
19 Examples of Acceptable Indications............................................................................................................71
20 Limits on Acceptability and Repair of Cut Edge Discontinuities of Plate ..................................................89
xii
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005
List of Figures
Figure Page No.
1 Classification of Welded Joints......................................................................................................................4
2 Illustrative Examples for Table 3...................................................................................................................7
3 Design Stress Range Curves for Categories A to F Redundant Structures..................................................13
4 Design Stress Range Curves for Categories A to F Non-Redundant Structures .........................................14
5 Fillet Welds on Opposite Sides of a Common Plate of Contact ..................................................................15
6 Transition of Thickness at Butt Joints of Parts Having Unequal Thickness................................................17
7 Transition of Width at Butt Joints of Parts Having Unequal Width ............................................................18
8 Combination of Bevel Groove and Fillet Weld Profiles..............................................................................19
9 Splices or Connections with Fillers Less Than 1/4 in. [6 mm] Thick .........................................................20
10 Splices or Connections with Fillers 1/4 in. [6 mm] or Thicker....................................................................21
11 Details for Prequalified Fillet Welds ...........................................................................................................22
12 Workmanship Tolerances in Assembly of Groove Welded Joints ..............................................................26
13 Positions of Groove Welds ..........................................................................................................................32
14 Positions of Fillet Welds ..............................................................................................................................33
15 Positions of Test Plates for Groove Welds ..................................................................................................35
16 Positions of Test Pipe or Tubing for Groove Welds ....................................................................................36
17 Positions of Test Plates for Fillet Welds ......................................................................................................37
18 Positions of Test Pipe for Fillet Welds ........................................................................................................38
19 Procedure Qualification—Location of Test Specimens for 2 in. [50 mm] or 3 in. [75 mm]
Diameter Pipe...............................................................................................................................................38
20 Procedure Qualification—Location of Test Specimens for 6 in. [150 mm] or 8 in. [200 mm]
Diameter Pipe...............................................................................................................................................40
21 Procedure Qualification—Location of Test Specimens for Electroslag and Electrogas
Welded Plate ................................................................................................................................................40
22 Procedure Qualification—Location of Test Specimens for Welded Test Plate Over
3/8 in. [10 mm] Thick ..................................................................................................................................41
23 Procedure Qualification—Location of Test Specimens for Welded Test Plate
3/8 in. [10 mm] Thick ..................................................................................................................................41
24 Procedure Qualification—Fillet Weld Soundness Test (Plate to Plate) ......................................................43
25 Procedure Qualification—Fillet Weld Soundness Test (Pipe to Pipe) ........................................................44
26 Procedure Qualification—Fillet Weld Soundness Test (Pipe to Plate) .......................................................44
27 Welder Qualification—Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness........................................................................46
28 Welder Qualification—Optional Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness—Horizontal Position......................47
29 Welder Qualification—Test Plate for Limited Thickness—Flat Position ...................................................48
30 Welder Qualification—Optional Test Plate for Limited Thickness—Horizontal Position .........................49
31 Welder Qualification—Fillet Weld Break and Macroetch Test Plate—Option 1 .......................................50
32 Welder Qualification—Fillet Weld Root-Bend Test Plate—Option 2 ........................................................51
33 Welder Qualification—Plate and Pipe Butt Joint Without Backing............................................................52
34 Welder Qualification—Pipe Butt Joint With Backing.................................................................................52
35 Welder Qualification—Test Joint for T-, Y-, and K-Connections on Pipe or Square or
Rectangular Tubing......................................................................................................................................52
36 Welder Qualification—Optional Test Joint for T-, Y-, and K-Connections on Square or
37 Welder Qualification—Location of Test Specimens for Welded Test Pipe and Square or
xiii
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005
Figure Page No.

38 Welding Operator Qualification—Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness.......................................................58
39 Welding Operator Qualification—Electroslag and Electrogas Welded Butt Joint......................................59
40 Tack Welder Qualification—Fillet Weld Break Specimen .........................................................................61
41 Tack Welder Qualification—Method of Rupturing Fillet Weld Break Specimen ......................................61
42 Cracks in Welded Joints...............................................................................................................................64
43 Acceptable and Unacceptable Weld Profiles ...............................................................................................65
44 Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on Approximately Equal
Thickness Joints 10 in. [250 mm] and Greater in Length ............................................................................68
Thickness Joints Less Than 10 in. [250 mm] in Length ..............................................................................68
46 Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on Transition Joints
10 in. [250 mm] and Greater in Length .......................................................................................................69
47 Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on Transition Joints
Less Than 10 in. [250 mm] in Length..........................................................................................................69
48 Examples of Aligned Rounded Indications .................................................................................................72
49 Examples of Groups of Aligned Rounded Indications ................................................................................72
50 Charts for Thickness Equal to 1/8 in. [3 mm] to 1/4 in. [6 mm], Inclusive .................................................72
51 Charts for Thickness Over 1/4 in. [6 mm] to 3/8 in. [10 mm], Inclusive ....................................................73
52 Charts for Thickness Over 3/8 in. [10 mm] to 3/4 in. [20 mm], Inclusive ..................................................73
53 Charts for Thickness Over 3/4 in. [20 mm] to 2 in. [50 mm], Inclusive .....................................................74
54 Charts for Thickness Over 2 in. [50 mm] to 4 in. [100 mm], Inclusive.......................................................75
55 Charts for Thickness Over 4 in. [100 mm] ..................................................................................................76
56 70° Calibration Standard..............................................................................................................................78
59 Typical Screen Calibration...........................................................................................................................81
60 Test Procedure—Butt Joint Welds...............................................................................................................82
61 Method for Detecting Longitudinal Discontinuities in Butt Joint Welds Not Ground Flush ......................82
62 Method for Detecting Longitudinal Discontinuities in Butt Joint Welds Ground Flush .............................83
63 Method for Detecting Longitudinal Discontinuities in Corner Welds Not Ground Flush...........................84
64 Procedure for Testing T-Joint Welds ...........................................................................................................84
65 Alternate Procedure for Testing T-Joint Welds ...........................................................................................84
66 Edge Discontinuities in Cut Material...........................................................................................................90
I.1 Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints.................................................................93
I.2 Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints ....................................................................104
xiv
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005
Specification for Welded Joints

in Machinery and Equipment
1. Scope 2. Normative References

This specification sets forth the classification of The following standards contain provisions which,
welded joints of carbon and low-alloy steels for use in through reference in this text, constitute provisions of
the design and manufacture of machinery and equipment this AWS standard. For undated references, the latest
subjected to static and dynamic loading. This specifi- edition of the referenced standard shall apply. For dated
cation is not intended to dictate load determination, references, subsequent amendments to, or revisions of,
design assumptions, safety factors, or calculation meth- any of these publications do not apply.
ods. These are the responsibility of the design engineer. 2.1 American Welding Society (AWS)1
The intent of this document is to establish the effect of (1) AWS A2.4, Standard Symbols for Welding,
weld joint geometry, welding practices, and quality con- Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination
trol on allowable stress levels. The specification also (2) AWS A3.0, Standard Welding Terms and
provides practices that can be used for qualification and Definitions
examination of welded joints used in fabrication of (3) AWS A5.1, Specification for Carbon Steel
machinery and equipment. It is not the intent of this Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding
specification to restrict the use of other proven methods (4) AWS A5.5, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel
and procedures which achieve acceptable results and Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding
which have been agreed to in writing by the Owner and (5) AWS A5.17, Specification for Carbon Steel
Manufacturer. Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding
This specification makes use of both U.S. Customary (6) AWS A5.18, Specification for Carbon Steel
Filler Metals for Gas Shielded Arc Welding
Units and the International System of Units (SI). The
(7) AWS A5.20, Specification for Carbon Steel
measurements may not be exact equivalents; therefore
Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding
each system must be used independently of the other
(8) AWS A5.23, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel
without combining in any way. The specification with
Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding
the designation D14.4 uses U.S. Customary Units. The
specification D14.4M uses SI Units. The latter are shown
Filler Metals for Gas Shielded Arc Welding
in appropriate columns in tables and figures or within
brackets [ ] when used in the text. Detailed dimensions Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding
on figures are in inches. A separate tabular form that (11) AWS A5.32, Specification for Welding Shielding
relates the U.S. Customary Units with SI Units may be Gases
used in tables and figures. (12) AWS B2.1, Specification for Welding Procedure
Safety and health issues and concerns are beyond the and Performance Qualification
scope of this standard, and therefore are not fully (13) AWS B4.0-98, Standard Methods for Mechanical
addressed herein. Safety and health information is avail- Testing of Welds, (U. S. Customary units only)
able from other sources, including, but not limited to, (14) AWS B4.0M:2000, Standard Methods for
ANSI Z49.1, Safety in Welding, Cutting, and Allied Pro- Mechanical Testing of Welds, (SI units only)
cesses, and applicable federal and state regulations.
Some sources of safety and health information can be 1. AWS standards are published by the American Welding
found in Annex C. Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, FL 33126.
1
This is a working document under consideration by and AWS committee. It is made available
solely to solicit comments from interested parties, and may not be relied upon or utilized for any
other purpose. Draft documents may change significantly in subsequent version.
DOCUMENT SUMMARY PAGE
DOCUMENT TITLE: D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1,

Specification for Welded Joints in Machinery and Equipment
Date Last Updated Initials Text Tables Figures Annex
5/15/01 DJL X X
9/21/01 DJL X X X X
3/11/02 AYO X
8/21/02 PH X X X
1/29/03 PH X X X X
1/31/03 PH X X X
3/13/03 PH X X X X
3/25/03 PH X X X X
Added Normative reference section (Section 2) and Definition Section (3), renumbered
subsequent sections and references, added all electronic figures in document, and made all
corrections/revisions from Oct. 2002 meeting. Not yet fully proofread.
3/28/03 PH Proofread and made additional corrections.
4/10/03 Draft WD-3 changed to CD-1 and balloted to D14B and D14.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Key Words - Classification, equipment, AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X

inspection and weld repair, An American National Standard
joint design, machinery
Approved by
American National Standards Institute
Insert Date
Specification for Welded Joints in

Machinery and Equipment
Supersedes AWS D14.4-97
Prepared by
Under the Direction of

AWS Technical Activities Committee
Approved for Publication by

AWS Board of Directors
ABSTRACT
This specification establishes common acceptance criteria for classifying and applying carbon
and low-alloy steel welded joints used in the manufacture of machines and equipment. It also
covers weld joint design, workmanship, quality control requirements and procedures, welding
operator and welding procedure qualification, weld joint inspection (visual, radiographic,
ultrasonic, magnetic particle, liquid penetrant), repair of weld defects, and heat treatment.
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY

550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, Florida 33126
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 1 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Statement on Use of AWS American National Standards

All standards (codes, specifications, recommended practices, methods, classifications, and guides) of the American Welding Society are
voluntary consensus standards that have been developed in accordance with the rules of the American National Standards Institute. When AWS
standards are either incorporated in, or made part of, documents that are included in federal or state laws and regulations, or the regulations of
other governmental bodies, their provisions carry the full legal authority of the statute. In such cases, any changes in those AWS standards must
be approved by the governmental body having statutory jurisdiction before they can become a part of those laws and regulations. In all cases,
these standards carry the full legal authority of the contract or other document that invokes the AWS standards. Where this contractual
relationship exists, changes in or deviations from requirements of an AWS standard must be by agreement between the contracting parties.
International Standard Book Number: 0-87171-715-8
American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, FL 33126
© 200[Year Published] by American Welding Society. All rights reserved

Printed in the United States of America
AWS American National Standards are developed through a consensus standards development process that brings together volunteers
representing varied viewpoints and interests to achieve consensus. While AWS administers the process and establishes rules to promote fairness
in the development of consensus, it does not independently test, evaluate, or verify the accuracy of any information or the soundness of any
judgments contained in its standards.
AWS disclaims liability for any injury to persons or to property, or other damages of any nature whatsoever, whether special, indirect,
consequential or compensatory, directly or indirectly resulting from the publication, use of, or reliance on this standard. AWS also makes no
guaranty or warranty as to the accuracy or completeness of any information published herein.
In issuing and making this standard available, AWS is not undertaking to render professional or other services for or on behalf of any person or
entity. Nor is AWS undertaking to perform any duty owed by any person or entity to someone else. Anyone using these documents should rely
on his or her own independent judgment or, as appropriate, seek the advice of a competent professional in determining the exercise of
reasonable care in any given circumstances.
This standard may be superseded by the issuance of new editions. Users should ensure that they have the latest edition.
Publication of this standard does not authorize infringement of any patent. AWS disclaims liability for the infringement of any patent resulting
from the use or reliance on this standard.
Finally, AWS does not monitor, police, or enforce compliance with this standard, nor does it have the power to do so.
On occasion, text, tables, or figures are printed incorrectly, constituting errata. Such errata, when discovered are posted on the AWS web page
(www.aws.org).
Official interpretations of any of the technical requirements of this standard may be obtained by sending a request, in writing, to the Managing
Director Technical Services, American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, FL 33126 (see Annex B). With regard to technical
inquiries made concerning AWS standards, oral opinions on AWS standards may be rendered. However, such opinions represent only the
personal opinions of the particular individuals giving them. These individuals do not speak on behalf of AWS, nor do these oral opinions
constitute official or unofficial opinions or interpretations of AWS. In addition, oral opinions are informal and should not be used as a substitute
for an official interpretation.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the AWS D14 Committee on Machinery and Equipment. It must be reviewed every five years
and if not revised, it must be either reaffirmed or withdrawn. Comments (recommendations, additions, or deletions) and any pertinent data that
may be of use in improving this standard are required and should be addressed to AWS Headquarters. Such comments will receive careful
consideration by the AWS D14 Committee on Machinery and Equipment and the author of the comments will be informed of the Committee’s
response to the comments. Guests are invited to attend all meetings of the AWS D14 Committee on Machinery and Equipment to express their
comments verbally. Procedures for appeal of an adverse decision concerning all such comments are provided in the Rules of Operation of the
Technical Activities Committee. A copy of these Rules can be obtained from the American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami,
FL 33126.
Photocopy Rights
Authorization to photocopy items for internal, personal, or educational classroom use only, or the internal, personal, or educational classroom
use only of specific clients, is granted by the American Welding Society (AWS) provided that the appropriate fee is paid to the Copyright
Clearance Center, 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: 978-750-8400; online: http://www.copyright.com.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 2 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Personnel
D. J. Landon, Chairman Vermeer Manufacturing Company

D. J. Malito, 2nd V. Chairman Girard Machine Company, Incorporated
P. Howe, Secretary American Welding Society
D. B. Ashley Hartford Steam Boiler Inspection & Insurance
Company
G. L. Babb Chubb Insurance Company
B. K. Banzhaf CNH Global N.V.
P. W. Cameron Crenlo, Incorporated
C. E. Childress* Consultant
P. Collins WeldCon Engineering
R. T. Hemzacek* Consultant
B. D. Horn Consultant
T. J. Landon Chicago Bridge & Iron Company
M. R. Malito Girard Machine Company, Incorporated
G. W. Martens Link Belt Company
D. C. Martinez Danmar Engineering Company, Incorporated
A. R. Mellini Mellini & Associates, Incorporated
H. W. Mishler* Consultant
R. E. Munson R&M Engineering
J. G. Nelson TRW Incorporated
A. R. Olsen Oldenburg Group-Lake Shore, Incorporated
L. Schweinegruber Robinson Industries, Incorporated
P. J. Palzkill* Consultant
J.L. Warren CNH Global
E. G. Yevick Weld-Met International, Incorporated
V. R.. Zegers R. E. Technical Services, Incorporated
AWS D14B Subcommittee on General Design and Practices

D. J. Malito, Chairman Girard Machine Company, Incorporated
P. Howe, Secretary American Welding Society
D. B. Ashley Hartford Steam Boiler Inspection & Insurance
Company
B. K. Banzhaf CNH Global N.V.
P. W. Cameron Crenlo, Incorporated
C. E. Childress* Consultant
D. J. Landon Vermeer Manufacturing Company
M. R. Malito Girard Machine Company, Incorporated
D. C. Martinez Danmar Engineering Company, Incorporated
H. W. Mishler* Consultant
P. Xu Link Belt C. E. Company
E. G. Yevick* Weld-Met International, Incorporated
V. R.. Zegers* R. E. Technical Services, Incorporated
*Advisory
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 3 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Foreword
(This Foreword is not a part of AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, Specification for Welded Joints in
Machinery and Equipment, but is included for informational purposes only.)
This standard was initially developed in 1966 to provide the user with a single document
covering all aspects of the welding of machinery and equipment. Over time, other standards for
specific areas in the machinery and equipment field were developed, and this document then
served as a supplement document to these standards and continued to provide a basis for other
areas in the machinery and equipment field not served by a specific standard.
This document is still intended to be referenced by all machinery and equipment
subcommittees such as cranes, earth moving equipment, machine tools, presses, and rotating
equipment, and to be utilized in the preparation of new and revised codes and specifications.
Thus, as the purpose of this document has undergone a subtle change, the committee has changed
the title of this document to Specification for Welded Joints in Machinery and Equipment from
its former title of Classification of Welded Joints for Machinery and Equipment.
The purpose of this specification is not to restrict the use of other proven methods and
procedures for welding of machinery and equipment. Where such methods and procedures exist,
this standard should be referenced as a supplement. This revised publication includes corrections,
updated data, clarifications, methods of removal and repair of weld defects, and additional
information to make this specification more complete for its intended use.
Comments and suggestions for the improvement of this standard are welcomed. They should
be sent to:
Secretary, AWS D14 Committee on Machinery and Equipment, American Welding Society, 550
N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, FL 33136.
Official interpretations of any of the technical requirements of this standard may be obtained by
sending a request, in writing, to the Managing Director, Technical Services Division, American
Welding Society. A formal reply will be issued after it has been reviewed by the appropriate
personnel following established procedures. Guidelines for technical inquiries regarding AWS
standards are shown in Annex B.
This document will be reviewed periodically to assure its success in serving all parties
concerned with its provisions. Revisions will be issued when warranted.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 4 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Table of Contents
Personnel ......................................................................................................................................
Foreword ......................................................................................................................................
List of Figures...............................................................................................................................
List of Tables ................................................................................................................................
1. Scope ......................................................................................................................................
2. Normative References............................................................................................................
3. Definitions..............................................................................................................................
4. Classification of Welded Joints

4.1 Joint Classes ......................................................................................................................
4.2 Intermittent Welded Joints .................................................................................................
4.3 Quality Control Requirements............................................................................................
5. Welded Joint Design

5.1 Unit Stresses in Weld Metal ...............................................................................................
5.2 Fatigue Stress Provisions ...................................................................................................
5.3 Combined Unit Stresses and Toughness Requirements .......................................................
5.4 Filler Metals.......................................................................................................................
5.5 Lap Joints ..........................................................................................................................
5.6 Corner and T-Joints ...........................................................................................................
5.7 Prohibited Types of Joints and Welds in Dynamic Applications ..........................................
5.8 Combinations of Welds ......................................................................................................
5.9 Welds in Combination with Rivets and Bolts ......................................................................
5.10 Fillet Weld Details............................................................................................................
5.11 Eccentricity of Connections..............................................................................................
5.12 Connections or Splices in Tension and Compression Members .........................................
5.13 Connections or Splices in Compression Members with Milled Joints.................................
5.14 Connections of Components of Built-Up Members...........................................................
5.15 Transition of Thicknesses or Widths at Butt Joints ...........................................................
5.16 Girders and Beams...........................................................................................................
5.17 Effective Weld Areas, Lengths and Throats......................................................................
5.18 Fillers...............................................................................................................................
5.19 Partial Joint Penetration Groove Weld Restrictions ..........................................................
5.20 Joint Qualification............................................................................................................
5.21 Details of Fillet Welds......................................................................................................
5.22 Details of Plug and Slot Welds .........................................................................................
5.23 Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds .......................................................................
5.24 Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds ............................................................................
6. Workmanship ........................................................................................................................
6.1 General..............................................................................................................................
6.2 Preparation of Materials.....................................................................................................
6.3 Assembly ..........................................................................................................................
Table of Contents (Cont'd)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 5 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
7. Qualification ..........................................................................................................................
Part A - General Qualification Requirements
7.1 Approved Procedures ........................................................................................................
7.2 Other Procedures...............................................................................................................
7.3 Welders, Welding Operators, and Tack Welders.................................................................
7.4 Qualification Responsibility................................................................................................
Part B - Welding Procedure Qualification

7.5 General..............................................................................................................................
7.6 Limitation of Variables.......................................................................................................
7.7 Types of Tests and Purposes..............................................................................................
7.8 Base Metal and Its Preparation...........................................................................................
7.9 Position of Test Welds .......................................................................................................
7.10 Production of Test Samples .............................................................................................
7.11 Test Specimens – Number, Type, and Preparation............................................................
7.12 Method of Testing Specimens
7.13 Test Results Required ......................................................................................................
7.14 Records ...........................................................................................................................
7.15 Retests.............................................................................................................................
Part C - Welder Qualification

7.16 General............................................................................................................................
7.17 Qualification Tests Required ............................................................................................
7.18 Limitation of Variables.....................................................................................................
7.19 Groove Weld Plate Qualification for Plate of Unlimited Thickness
7.20 Groove Weld Plate Qualification for Plate of Limited Thickness.......................................
7.21 Groove Weld Qualification Test for Butt Joints on Pipe or Square or Rectangular Tubing
7.22 Groove Weld Qualification Test for T-, Y-, or K-Connections on Pipe or Square or
Rectangular Tubing.........................................................................................................
7.23 Fillet Weld Qualification Test ...........................................................................................
7.24 Positions of Test Welds....................................................................................................
7.25 Base Metal.......................................................................................................................
7.26 Welding Procedure ..........................................................................................................
7.28 Method of Testing Specimens ..........................................................................................
7.30 Retests.............................................................................................................................
7.31 Period of Effectiveness.....................................................................................................
7.32 Records ...........................................................................................................................
Part D - Welding Operator Qualification

7.33 General............................................................................................................................
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 6 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Table of Contents (Cont'd)

7.36 Base Metal.......................................................................................................................
7.37 Welding Procedure ..........................................................................................................
7.38 Test Specimens - Number, Type, and Preparation ............................................................
7.40 Retests.............................................................................................................................
7.42 Records ...........................................................................................................................
Part E - Qualification of Tack Welders

7.43 General............................................................................................................................
7.46 Base Metal.......................................................................................................................
7.48 Method of Testing Specimens ..........................................................................................
7.50 Retests.............................................................................................................................
7.52 Records ...........................................................................................................................
8. Inspection...............................................................................................................................
8.1 Visual Inspection ...............................................................................................................
8.2 Radiographic Inspection.....................................................................................................
8.3 Ultrasonic Inspection .........................................................................................................
8.4 Magnetic Particle Inspection ..............................................................................................
8.5 Liquid Penetrant Inspection................................................................................................
9. Repair ...................................................................................................................................
9.1 Weld Repairs .....................................................................................................................
9.2 Base Metal Repairs ............................................................................................................
9.3 Repair Procedure ...............................................................................................................
10. Postweld Treatments .............................................................................................................

10.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................
10.2 Thermal Residual Stress Reduction ..................................................................................
10.3 Peening............................................................................................................................
10.4 Vibratory Conditioning ....................................................................................................
Annex A - Safety Considerations..............................................................................................

Annex B - Guidelines for Preparation of Technical Inquiries for AWS Technical Committees .
List of AWS D14 Documents on Machinery and Equipment.....................................................
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 7 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
List of Tables
Table Page
1 Weld Inspection Requirements..............................................................................................

2 Maximum Allowable Stress in Weld Metal............................................................................
3 Stress Categories to Determine the Allowable Stress Range from Tables 4 and 5 ..................
4 Allowable Fatigue Stress Range for Redundant Load Path Structures ...................................
5 Allowable Fatigue Stress Range for Non-Redundant Load Path Structures............................
6 Base Metal and Filler Metal Relationship ..............................................................................
7 Effective Weld Sizes of Flare Groove Welds .........................................................................
8 Minimum Fillet Weld Size for Prequalified Joints ..................................................................
9 Minimum Size of Full Strength Double Fillet Welds ..............................................................
10 Minimum Weld Size for Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds ...........................................
11 Maximum Allowable Chemical Composition Limits for Steels Prequalified for Welding ........
12 Procedure Qualification – Type and Position Limitations.......................................................
13 Procedure Qualification – Number and Type of Test Specimens Required and Range of
Thickness Qualified for Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds .......................................
14 Procedure Qualification – Number and Type of Test Specimens Required and Range of
Thickness Qualified for Fillet Welds......................................................................................
15 Welder and Welding Operator Qualification – Type and Position Limitations ........................
16 Welder and Welding Operator Qualification – Number and Type of Specimens Required and
Range of Thickness Qualified................................................................................................
17 Acceptance Criteria for Visual Inspection .............................................................................
18 Standard Hole-Type and Wire Image Quality Indicator Requirements ...................................
19 Examples of Acceptable Indications ......................................................................................
20 Limits on Acceptability and Repair of Cut Edge Discontinuities of Plate................................
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 8 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
List of Figures
Figure Page
1 Classification of Welded Joints..............................................................................................

2 Illustrative Examples for Table 2...........................................................................................
3 Design Stress Range Curves for Categories A to F Redundant Structures .............................
4 Design Stress Range Curves for Categories A to F Non-Redundant Structures .....................
5 Fillet Welds on Opposite Sides of a Common Plate of Contact ..............................................
6 Transition of Thickness at Butt Joints of Parts Having Unequal Thickness ............................
7 Transition of Width at Butt Joints of Parts Having Unequal Width ........................................
8 Combination of Bevel Groove and Fillet Weld Profiles..........................................................
9 Fillers Less Than 1/4 in. [6 mm] Thick ..................................................................................
10 Fillers 1/4 in. [6 mm] or Thicker ...........................................................................................
11 Details for Prequalified Fillet Welds ......................................................................................
12 Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints.............................................
13 Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints..................................................
14 Workmanship Tolerances in Assembly of Groove Welded Joints ...........................................
15 Positions of Groove Welds....................................................................................................
16 Positions of Fillet Welds .......................................................................................................
17 Positions of Test Plates for Groove Welds ...........................................................................
18 Positions of Test Pipe or Tubing for Groove Welds ..............................................................
19 Positions of Test Plates for Fillet Welds ...............................................................................
20 Positions of Test Pipe for Fillet Welds ..................................................................................
21 Procedure Qualification - Location of Test Specimens for 2 in. [50 mm] or 3 in. [75 mm]
Diameter Pipe .......................................................................................................................
22 Procedure Qualification - Location of Test Specimens for 6 in. [150 mm] or 8 in. [200 mm]
Diameter Pipe .......................................................................................................................
23 Procedure Qualification - Location of Test Specimens for Electroslag and Electrogas
Welded Plate ........................................................................................................................
24 Procedure Qualification - Location of Test Specimens for Welded Test Plate Over 3/8 in.
[10 mm] Thick .....................................................................................................................
25 Procedure Qualification - Location of Test Specimens for Welded Test Plate 3/8 in. [10
mm] Thick ...........................................................................................................................
26 Procedure Qualification - Fillet Weld Soundness Test (Plate to Plate) ...................................
27 Procedure Qualification - Fillet Weld Soundness Test (Pipe to Pipe) .....................................
28 Procedure Qualification - Fillet Weld Soundness Test (Pipe to Plate) ....................................
29 Welder Qualification - Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness.....................................................
30 Welder Qualification - Optional Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness - Horizontal Position .....
31 Welder Qualification - Test Plate for Limited Thickness – Flat Position.................................
32 Welder Qualification - Optional Test Plate for Limited Thickness - Horizontal Position.........
33 Welder Qualification - Plate and Pipe Butt Joint Without Backing.........................................
34 Welder Qualification - Pipe Butt Joint With Backing .............................................................
35 Welder Qualification - Test Joint for T-, Y-, and K-Connections on Pipe or Square or
Rectangular Tubing...............................................................................................................
36 Welder Qualification - Optional Test Joint for T-, Y-, and K-Connections on Square or
37 Welder Qualification - Fillet Weld Break and Macroetch Test Plate - Option 1......................
38 Welder Qualification - Fillet Weld Root-Bend Test Plate - Option 2......................................
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 9 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
List of Figures (Cont'd)

Figure Page
39 Welder Qualification - Location of Test Specimens for Welded Test Pipe and Square or
40 Welding Operator Qualification - Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness ....................................
41 Welding Operator Qualification - Electroslag and Electrogas Welded Butt Joint....................
42 Tack Welder Qualification - Fillet Weld Break Specimen ......................................................
43 Tack Welder Qualification - Method of Rupturing Fillet Weld Break Specimen.....................
44 Cracks in Welded Joints........................................................................................................
45 Acceptable and Unacceptable Weld Profiles ..........................................................................
46 Example of Penetrameter (Image Quality Indicator) ..............................................................
Thickness Joints 10 in. [250 mm] and Greater in Length .......................................................
Thickness Joints Less Than 10 in. [250 mm] in Length..........................................................
49 Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on Transition Joints 10
in. [250 mm] and Greater in Length ......................................................................................
50 Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on Transition Joints Less
Than 10 in. [250 mm] in Length............................................................................................
51 Hole-Type Image Quality Indicator (IQI) Design ..................................................................
52 Image Quality Indicator (Wire Penetrameter) ........................................................................
53 Aligned Rounded Indications ................................................................................................
54 Groups of Aligned Rounded Indications................................................................................
55 Charts for Thickness E Equal to 1/8 in. [3 mm] to 1/4 in. [6 mm] Inclusive ...........................
56 Charts for Thickness E Over 1/4 in. [6 mm] to 3/8 in. [10 mm] Inclusive...............................
57 Charts for Thickness E Over 3/8 in. [10 mm] to 3/4 in. [19 mm] Inclusive.............................
58 Charts for Thickness E Over 3/4 in. [19 mm] to 2 in. [50 mm] Inclusive................................
59 Charts for Thickness E Over 2 in. [50 mm] to 4 in. [100 mm] Inclusive.................................
60 Charts for Thickness E Over 4 in. [100 mm] .........................................................................
61 70° Calibration Standard.......................................................................................................
64 Typical Screen Calibration ....................................................................................................
65 Test Procedure - Butt Joint Welds ........................................................................................
66 Method for Detecting Longitudinal Discontinuities in Butt Joint Welds Not Ground Flush....
67 Method for Detecting Longitudinal Discontinuities in Butt Joint Welds Ground Flush...........
68 Method for Detecting Longitudinal Discontinuities in Corner Welds Not Ground Flush ........
69 Procedure for Testing T-Joint Welds.....................................................................................
70 Method of Using Procedure for Testing T-Joint Welds..........................................................
71 Edge Discontinuities in Cut Material.....................................................................................
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 10 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Specification for Welded Joints in Machinery and Equipment
1. Scope
This specification sets forth the classification of welded joints of carbon and low-alloy steels for
use in the design and manufacture of machinery and equipment subjected to static and dynamic
loading. This specification is not intended to dictate load determination, design assumptions,
safety factors, or calculation methods. These are the responsibility of the design engineer. The
intent of this document is to establish the effect of weld joint geometry, welding practices, and
quality control on allowable stress levels. The specification also provides practices that can be
used for qualification and examination of welded joints used in fabrication of machinery and
equipment. It is not the intent of this specification to restrict the use of other proven methods and
procedures which achieve acceptable results and which have been agreed to in writing by the
purchaser and fabricator.
This specification makes use of both U.S. Customary Units and the International System of Units
(SI). The measurements may not be exact equivalents; therefore each system must be used
independently of the other without combining in any way. The specification with the designation
D14.4 uses U.S. Customary Units. The specification D14.4M uses SI Units. The latter are
shown in appropriate columns in tables and figures or within brackets [ ] when used in the text.
Detailed dimensions on figures are in inches. A separate tabular form that relates the U.S.
Customary Units with SI Units may be used in tables and figures.
Safety and health issues and concerns are beyond the scope of this specification and, therefore, are
not fully addressed herein. Some safety and health information can be found in Annex A. Safety
and health information is available from other sources, including, but not limited to, ANSI Z49.1,
Safety in Welding, Cutting, and Allied Processes, and applicable federal and state regulations.
2. Normative References
1
2.1 AWS Standards
AWS A1.1, Metric Practice Guide for the Welding Industry
AWS A2.4, Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination
AWS A3.0, Standard Welding Terms and Definitions
AWS A5.01, Filler Metal Procurement Guidelines
AWS A5.1, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding
AWS A5.5, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding
AWS A5.17, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc
Welding
AWS A5.18, Specification for Carbon Steel Filler Metals for Gas Shielded Arc Welding
AWS A5.20, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding
1. Available through: Global Engineering Documents, Handling Services Group, 15 Inverness Way East,
Englewood, CO 80112-5776, (800) 854-7179 (303)397-7956, Fax (303-397-2740, Internet:
www.global.ihs.com.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 11 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
AWS A5.23, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc
AWS A5.28, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Filler Metals for Gas Shielded Arc Welding
AWS A5.29, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding
AWS B2.1, Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification
AWS B2.1-x-xxx, Standard Welding Procedure Specifications
AWS B4.0, Standard Methods for Mechanical Testing of Welds
AWS QC-7, Standard for Certified Welders
AWS QC1, Standard and Guide for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors
2
2.2 ASME Standards
ASME B46.1, Surface Texture (Surface Roughness, Waviness, and Lay)
ASME Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Section IX: Welding and
Brazing Qualifications
ASME Section VIII-Div 1, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1:
Design and Fabrication of Pressure Vessels
ASME Section VIII-Div 2, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 2:
Alternative Rules
2.3 ASTM Standards3

ASTM A6, Specification for General requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet
Piling, and Bars for Structural Use
ASTM A370, Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
ASTM A435, Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates for
Pressure Vessels
ASTM E94, Guide for Radiographic Testing
ASTM E142, Method for Controlling Quality of Radiographic Testing
ASTM E164, Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments
ASTM E390, Reference Radiographs for Steel Fusion Welds
ASTM E587, Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Angle Beam Examination by the Contact
Method
ASTM E709, Practice for Magnetic Particle Examination
ASTM E747, Guide for Controlling Quality of Radiographic Testing Using Wire
Penetrameters
ASTM E1025, Practice for Hole-Type Image Quality Indicators Used for Radiography
ASTM E1032, Method for Radiographic Examination of Weldments.
2. Available through: American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 3 Park Avenue, New York, NY 10017, Internet:
http://www.cssinfo.com/info/asme.html.
3. Available through: American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), PO Box C700, 100 Barr Harbor Drive,
West Conshohocken, Pennsylvania 19428-2959; Internet: http://www.techstreet.com/info/astm.tmpl.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 12 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
4
2.4 ASNT Specifications
ANSI/ASNT CP-189, Qualification and Certification of Nondestructive Testing Personnel
ASNT-TC-1A, Recommended Practice, Personnel Qualification and Certification in
Nondestructive Testing
5
2.5 Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
W178.2, Certification of Welding Inspectors
6
2.6 American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (AISC)
AISC 335, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings Allowable Stress Design, and Plastic
Design
7
2.7 American Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges
8
2.8 Safety Documents
ANSI Z49.1, Safety in Welding, Cutting, and Allied Processes.
ANSI Z87.1, Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection.
AWS F4.1, Recommended Practices for the Preparation for Welding and Cutting of
Containers and Piping.
P-1, Safe Handling of Compressed Gases in Containers.
3. Definitions – The terms that follow are defined for the purposes of this specification. Other
terms used in this specification are defined in AWS A3.0, Standard Welding Terms and
Definitions.
effective weld areas

groove welds. The effective area is the effective weld length multiplied by the weld size.
(See 5.17.1 for additional details.)
fillet welds. The effective area is the effective weld length multiplied by the effective throat.
(See 5.17.2 for additional details.)
4. Available through: Global Engineering Documents, Handling Services Group, 15 Inverness Way East,
Englewood, CO 80112-5776, (800) 854-7179 (303)397-7956, Fax (303-397-2740, Internet:
www.global.ihs.com.
5. Documents can be obtained from Canadian Standards Association (CSA), 178 Rexdale Blvd. Toronto, Ontario,
M9W 1R3, Canada.
6. Documents can be obtained from American Institute of Steel Construction, One East Wacker Drive, Suite
3100, Chicago, IL 60601-2001; Internet: http://www.aisc.org.
7. Documents can be obtained from American Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials, 444 North
Capitol Street N.W., Suite 249, Washington, DC 20001, Phone: (202) 624-5800, Fax: (202) 624-5806 ;
Internet: https://www.transportation.org/publications/bookstore.nsf/Home?OpenForm.
8. All, except P-1, available through: Global Engineering Documents, Handling Services Group, 15 Inverness
Way East, Englewood, CO 80112-5776, (800) 854-7179 (303)397-7956, Fax (303-397-2740, Internet:
www.global.ihs.com. P-1 available from the Compressed Gas Association, 1725 Jefferson Davis Highway,
Suite 1004, Arlington, VA 22202-4102; Internet http://www.cganet.com/Publication.asp?mode=p.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 13 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
plug and slot welds. The effective area shall be the nominal area of the hole or slot in the
plane of the faying surface.
Engineer. The Engineer is the responsible technical authority.
Manufacturer. Manufacturer refers to the organization responsible for the performance of the
work covered by this specification.
maximum allowable stress. The maximum allowable stress is the ultimate tensile strength of the
base metal, divided by the safety factor selected by the designer. It is suggested that the safety
factor not be less than four (4).
non-redundant load path structures. A non-redundant load path member is one where there is
only one load path and where a fracture will cause collapse.
Owner. The Owner is the person, company, or agency that purchases the equipment.
principal structural weldments. Those weldments that carry the main working loads during
normal operations are the principal structural weldments.
primary welds. Welds, the failure of which would result in (1) a carried load being dropped in
excess of 4 in. [100 mm] or (2) an increase of stress beyond the allowable stress limits, as defined
in Table 2, Allowable Stresses, in other welds or base metal. Any welds subject to only
compressive stresses are not considered primary.
redundant load path structures. Structures with redundant load paths have multi-load paths
where a single fracture in a member cannot lead to collapse.
stress range. Stress range is defined as the algebraic difference between the maximum stress and
minimum stress.
secondary welds. Secondary welds are those welds not covered by the requirements of primary
welds and shall be noted as such on the drawings. They must carry compressive stress only or be
subjected to a stress of less than 5000 psi [34.5 MPa]. Secondary welds only need to meet the
requirements of Section 6, Workmanship, and Section 8, Weld Quality and Inspection.
tensile strength of the weld metal. The minimum tensile strength specified for the filler metal
classification as published in the applicable filler metal specification.
4. Classification of Welded Joints.
4.1 Joint Classes. Welded joints are divided into the following six classifications based on the
design of the joint and anticipated performance (see Figure 1). Each class is also rated for
inspection requirements (see Table 1) and maximum allowable stress levels (see Figure 2 and
Table 2) which are described in later sections of this specification.
4.1.1 Class I is a complete joint penetration butt weld, welded from both sides with the root of
the first side chipped or gouged and ground back to sound metal and reinforcements ground or
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 14 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
9
machined flush with the direction of removal parallel to the principal stress.
4.1.2 Class II is a complete joint penetration butt, T-, or corner joint welded from both sides,
with the root of the first side chipped or gouged and ground back to sound metal before
9, 10
depositing the second side.
4.1.3 Class III is a complete joint penetration butt, T-, or corner joint welded from both sides,
or from one side using backing strips which are not removed after welding.
4.1.4 Class IV is a complete joint penetration butt, T-, or corner joint welded from one side
without the use of backing; a partial penetration butt, T-, or corner joint welded on both sides; or
10
a fillet lap, T-, or corner joint welded on both sides.
Table 1
(1, 2)
Weld Inspection Requirements
Radiographic (see 8.2) Magnetic-Particle Visual Inspection (see 8.1)

Class or (see 8.4) or Liquid
(see Ultrasonic (see 8.3) Penetrant (see 8.5) Discontinuities Dimensions
4.1) Examination Examination (see Table 16) (see 8.1.7)
I yes yes yes yes
II yes (10%) yes yes yes
III yes yes yes
IV yes yes
V yes yes
VI yes yes
Notes:
(1) 100% inspection is required unless otherwise indicated.
(2) Material subject to delayed cracking such as ASTM A514 and A517 shall have inspections performed not less than 48 hours
after the completed weld has cooled down to ambient temperatures
4.1.5 Class V is a partial joint penetration butt, T-, or corner joint welded on one side; a fillet,
plug or slot welded lap, T-, or corner joint welded on one side.
4.1.6 Class VI is a butt, T-, corner, lap, fillet, edge or plug weld made with no special joint
preparation; a welded joint of secondary importance not subject to dynamic loading; a weld of
secondary importance in strength.
4.2 Intermittent Welded Joints. Intermittent partial joint penetration welds in butt, T-, and
corner joints and intermittent welded lap joints and plug welds are placed in Joint Class V or VI.
4.3 Quality Control Requirements. Table 1 indicates the inspection requirements for Joint
Classes I through VI. The service performance of a welded joint may be adversely affected by the
presence of discontinuities. The weld tolerance for discontinuities depends upon the size, shape,
and orientation of the discontinuities within the stress system and the severity of the stress
imposed. Nondestructive inspection procedures do not necessarily reveal the influences of
9. Back gouging is not necessary where process and procedure have demonstrated that satisfactory root tie-in is
obtained.
10. Double-welded T-joints may be reinforced with fillet welds.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 15 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
discontinuities within a stress system. Weld tolerance for discontinuities may be regulated to the
severity of the stress imposed and the sensitivity of the inspection procedure. This approach is
used in the development of quality control requirements for the classes of weldments as
established in Table 1. Information furnished to the bidder shall identify the extent of inspection
to be performed.
Figure 1 – Classification of Welded Joints
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 16 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Figure 1 (continued) — Classification of Welded Joints
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 17 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
STRESS
CATEGORIES
General Note: a = width, b = thickness, c = length, and R = radius of components for items shown in Figure 2
Figure 2 — Illustrative Examples for Table 2
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 18 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
General Note: a = width, b = thickness, c = length, and R = radius of components for items shown in Figure 2
Figure 2 (continued)— Illustrative Examples for Table 2
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 19 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Table 2
Maximum Allowable Stress in Weld Metal (see 5.2)
Type of
(1) (2)
Weld Stress in Weld Allowable Stress Required Weld Strength Level
Tension normal to the Same as base metal. Matching weld metal must be used.
effective area.
Compression normal to the Same as base metal. Weld metal with a strength level equal to or one
effective area. classification (10 ksi) less than matching weld
Complete metal may be used.
Joint
Penetration Tension or compression Same as base metal. Weld metal with a strength level equal to or less
Groove Welds parallel to the axis of the than matching weld metal may be used.
(Class I, II, weld.
III, or IV)
Shear on the effective area. 0.27 x nominal tensile strength of Weld metal with a strength level equal to or less
weld metal (ksi), except shear than matching weld metal may be used.
stress on base metal shall not
exceed 0.36 x yield strength of
base metal.
Joint not 0.45 x nominal tensile strength of Weld metal with a strength level equal to or less
designed to weld metal (ksi), except shear than matching weld metal may be used.
bear. stress on base metal shall not
Compression exceed 0.55 x yield strength of
normal to base metal.
effective area.
Joint Same as base metal. Weld metal with a strength level equal to or less
designed to than matching weld metal may be used.
bear.
Partial Joint Tension or compression Same as base metal. Weld metal with a strength level equal to or less
Penetration parallel to the axis of the than matching weld metal may be used.
Groove Welds weld.(3)
(Class IV or
V) Shear parallel to axis of 0.27 x nominal tensile strength of Weld metal with a strength level equal to or less
metal. weld metal (ksi), except shear than matching weld metal may be used.
base metal.
Tension normal to effective 0.27 x nominal tensile strength of Weld metal with a strength level equal to or less
area. weld metal (ksi), except tensile than matching weld metal may be used.
base metal.
Shear on effective area. 0.27 x nominal tensile strength of Weld metal with a strength level equal to or less
Fillet Welds weld metal (ksi). than matching weld metal may be used.
(Class IV, V,
or VI) Tension or compression Same as base metal. Weld metal with a strength level equal to or less
parallel to axis of weld.³ than matching weld metal may be used.
Plug and Slot Shear parallel to faying 0.27 x nominal tensile strength of Weld metal with a strength level equal to or less
Welds (Class surfaces (on effective area). weld metal (ksi), except shear than matching weld metal may be used.
V or VI) stress on base metal shall not
base metal.
Notes:
(1) For an explanation of effective area, see 5.17.
(2) For matching weld metal, see Table 6.
(3) Fillet weld and partial joint penetration groove welds joining the component elements of built-up members, such as flange-to-web
connections, may be designed without regard to the tensile or compressive stress in these elements parallel to the axis of the welds.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 20 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
5. Welded Joint Design
5.1 Unit Stresses in Weld Metal. Except as modified by 5.2 and 5.3, allowable unit stresses in
weld metal shall not exceed those listed in Table 2.
5.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, the maximum shear stress in the net section shall be 65
percent of the maximum allowable stress in tension.
5.1.2 Stress on the effective throat area of fillet welds (see 5.17.2) is considered as shear
stress regardless of the direction of application.
5.1.3 The effective area of plug and slot welds (see 5.17.3) is considered to resist shear
stresses only.
11
5.2 Fatigue Stress Provisions. The fatigue stress provisions of this specification , as described
in 5.2.1, have been derived from the Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges as adopted by
the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), or from
AISC 335, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings Allowable Stress Design, and Plastic
Design by the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). The cycle life should be
determined by the Engineer to meet the planned life requirements of the structure. Fatigue stress
provisions may be modified by more stringent requirements of specific codes. Stress categories
for determining allowable stress ranges are described in Table 3 for the illustrated examples
shown in Figure 2.
11. P. B. Keating and J. W. Fisher, “Evaluation of Fatigue Test and Design Criteria on Welded Details," National
Cooperation Highway Research Program Report #286.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 21 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Table 3
Stress Categories to Determine the Allowable Stress Range from Tables 4 and 5
Stress
Category Illustrative
General Kind of (See Tables Examples(2)
Condition Situation(4, 5, 6, 7) Stress
(1)
4 and 5)
(3)
(see Figure 2)
Plain Member Base metal with rolled or cleaned surface. Flame-cut edges
with ANSI smoothness of 1000 or less. T or Rev. A 1, 2
Base metal in members without attachments, built-up plates or
shapes connected by continuous full penetration groove welds
or by continuous fillet welds parallel to the direction of applied
stress. T or Rev. A 3, 4, 5, 6
Base metal in members without attachments, built-up plates, or
shapes connected by full penetration groove welds with backing
bars not removed, or by partial penetration groove welds
parallel to the direction of applied stress. T or Rev. B’ 3, 4, 5, 6
Base metal at toe welds on girder webs or flanges adjacent to
Built-up
welded transverse stiffeners. T or Rev. C 7
Members
Base metal at ends of partial length welded cover plates
narrower than the flange having square or tapered ends, with or
without welds across the ends or wider than flange with welds
across the ends.
Flange thickness ≤0.8 in. [20 mm] T or Rev. E’ 5
Flange thickness >0.8 in. [20 mm] T or Rev. E’ 5
Base metal at end of partial length welded cover plates wider
than the flange without welds across the ends. T or Rev. E’ 5
Base metal and weld metal at full penetration groove welded
splices of parts of similar cross section ground flush, with
grinding in the direction of applied stress and with weld
soundness established by radiographic or ultrasonic inspection
in accordance with the requirements of Section 6. T or Rev. B 8, 9
splices at transitions in width or thickness, with welds ground
to provide slopes no steeper than 1 in 2.5 with grinding in the
direction of applied stress and with weld soundness established
Groove Welds by radiographic or ultrasonic inspection in accordance with the
requirements of Section 8.
A514 base metal. T or Rev. B’ 10, 11
Other base metals. T or Rev. B 10, 11
splices, with or without transitions having slopes no greater
than 1 in 2.5 when removed, but weld soundness is established
T or Rev. C 8, 9, 10, 11
by radiographic or ultrasonic inspection in accordance with the
requirements of Section 8.
Partial- Weld metal at partial-penetration transverse groove welds,
Penetration based on effective throat area of the weld or welds.
Groove Welds T or Rev. F 14
(continued)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 22 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Table 3 (continued)
Stress
(3)
Condition Situation(4, 5, 6, 7) Stress(1) 4 and 5) (See Figure 2)
Base metal at intermittent fillet welds. T or Rev. E
Base metal at junction at axially loaded members with fillet
welded end connections. Welds shall be disposed about the
axis of the members so as to balance weld stresses.
Fillet Welded b ≤ 1 in. [25 mm] T or Rev. E 15, 16
Connections b > 1 in. [25 mm] T or Rev. E’ 15, 16
Base metal members connected with transverse fillet welds.
b ≤ 1/2 in. [13 mm] T or Rev. C 18, 19
b > 1/2 in. [13mm] See note (3).
Weld metal of continuous or intermittent longitudinal 5, 15, 16
Fillet Welds
or transverse fillet welds S F 18, 19
Plug or Slot Base metal at plug or slut welds. T or Rev. E 25
Welds Shear on plug or slot welds. S F 25
Base metal at details attached by full-penetration groove welds
subject to longitudinal and/or transverse loading when the
detail embodies a transition radius R with the weld
termination ground smooth and for transverse loading, the
weld soundness established by radiographic or ultrasonic
inspection in accordance with Section 8.
Longitudinal loading
R > 24 in. [600 mm]
T or Rev. B 12
24 in. [600 mm] ≥ R > 6 in. [150 mm]
T or Rev. C 12
6 in. [150 mm] ≥ R > 2 in. [50 mm] T or Rev. D 12
2 in. [50 mm] ≥ R T or Rev. E 12
Detail base metal for transverse loading; equal
thickness and reinforcement removed.
R > 24 in. [600 mm]
Attachments T or Rev. B 12
24 in. [600 mm] ≥ R > 6 in. [150 mm]
T or Rev. C 12
2 in. [50 mm] ≥ R T or Rev. E 12, 13
thickness and reinforcement not removed.
R > 24 in. [600 mm]
T or Rev. B 12
24 in. [600 mm] ≥ R > 6 in. [150 mm]
T or Rev. C 12
2 in. [50 mm] ≥ R T or Rev. E 12, 13
Detail base metal for transverse loading; unequal
R > 2 in. [50 mm] T or Rev. D 12
2 in. [50 mm] ≥ R T or Rev. E 12, 13
(continued)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 23 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Table 3 (continued)
Stress
(3)
Condition Situation(4, 5, 6, 7) Stress(1) 4 and 5) (See Figure 2)
All R T or Rev. E 12, 13
Detail base metal for transverse loading.
R > 6 in. [150 mm] T or Rev. C
6 in. [150 mm] ≥ R > 2 in. [50 mm] T or Rev. D
2 in. [50 mm] ≥ R T or Rev. E 17
Base metal at detail attached by full-penetration
groove welds subject to longitudinal loading.
2 in. [50 mm] < a <12c or 4 in. [100 mm] T or Rev. D 13
a <12c or 4 in. [100 mm] when b ≤1 in. [25 mm] T or Rev. E 13
a <12c or 4 in. [100 mm] when b >1 in. [25 mm] T or Rev. E’ 13
Base metal at detail attached by fillet welds or partial
penetration groove welds subject to longitudinal
loading. 13, 21, 22, 23,
a < 2 in. [50 mm] T or Rev. 24
2 in. [50 mm] < a <12c or 4 in. [100 mm] T or Rev. 13, 21, 22, 24
Attachments a < 12c or 4 in. [100 mm] when b ≤ 1 in. [25 mm] T or Rev. C 13, 21, 22, 24
(continued) a < 12c or 4 in. [100 mm] when b > 1 in. [25 mm] T or Rev. E’ 13, 21, 22, 24
Base metal attached by fillet welds or partial-
penetration groove welds subjected to longitudinal
loading when the weld termination embodies a
transition radius with the weld termination ground
smooth.
R > 2 in. [50 mm] T or Rev. D 17
R ≤ 2 in. [50 mm] T or Rev. E 17
Fillet-welded attachments where the weld termination
embodies a transition radius, weld termination ground
smooth, and main material subject to longitudinal
loading.
Detail base metal for transverse loading. 12, 13
R > 2 in. [50 mm] T or Rev. D 17
R ≤ 2 in. [50 mm] T or Rev. E 17
Base metal at stud-type shear connector attached by
fillet weld or automatic end weld. T or Rev. C 20
Shear stress on nominal area of stud-type shear
connectors. S F 12
Notes:
(1) “T" signifies range in tensile stress only; "Rev." signifies a range involving reversal of tensile or compressive stress; "S"
signifies range in shear, including shear stress reversal.
(2) These examples are provided us guidelines and are not intended to exclude other reasonably similar situations.
(3) Allowable fatigue stress range on throat of fillet welds transversely loaded is a function of the effective throat and plate
thickness. (See Frank and Fisher, Journal of the Structural Division, American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE), Vol. Vol.
105, No. ST9, Sept. 1979.)
(4) "Longitudinally Loaded" signifies direction of applied stress is parallel to the longitudinal axis of the weld.
"Transversely Loaded" signifies direction of applied stress is perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the weld.
(5) Transversely loaded partial penetration groove welds are prohibited.
(6) R = radius for items shown in Figure 2 that have a radius.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 24 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
(7) a is the width, b is the thickness, and c is the length of components for items shown in Figure 2.
5.2.1 Allowable Fatigue Stress. Weldments subject to repeated variations or reversals of

stress shall be designed so the maximum stress does not exceed that allowed in Section 5 and 5.1,
and the stress range does not exceed the allowable fatigue stress range for redundant structures
given in Table 4 and shown graphically in Figure 3 for the applicable stress category and nominal
number of loading cycles. The allowable fatigue stress ranges listed in Table 5 and Figure 4
(derived by applying a varying factor of safety to the stress ranges values of Table 4) are
suggested for non-redundant structures.
Figure 3 — Design Stress Range Curves for Categories A to F Redundant Structures
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 25 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Figure 4 — Design Stress Range Curves for Categories A to F Non-Redundant Structures
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 26 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Table 4
(1)
Allowable Fatigue Stress Range for Redundant Load Path Structures
Allowable Range of Stress(2), ksi [MPa]
Stress Category For 20 000 to For up to For up to For over
(3)
(See Table 3) 100 000 cycles 500 000 cycles 2 000 000 cycles 2 000 000 cycles
A 63 [434] 37 [255] 24 [165] 24 [165]
B 49 [338] 29 [200] 18 [124] 16 [110]
B 39 [269] 23 [159] 15 [103] 12 [83]
C 35 [241] 21 [145] 13 [90] 10 [69]
(4)
12 [83]
D 28 [193] 16 [110] 10 [69] 7 [48]
E 22 [152] 13 [90] 8 [55] 5 [34]
E 16 [110] 9 [62] 6 [41] 3 [21]
F 15 [103] 12 [83] 9 [62] 8 [55]
Notes:
(1) Structure types with multi-load paths where a single fracture in a member cannot lead to the collapse.
(2) The range of stress is defined as the algebraic difference between the maximum stress and the minimum stress. Tension
stress is considered to have the opposite algebraic sign form compression stress.
(3) Structures under 20 000 cycles are to be considered statically loaded.
(4) At toe of transverse stiffener welds on girder webs or flanges.
Table 5
(1)
Allowable Fatigue Stress Range for Non-Redundant Load Path Structures
Allowable Range of Stress(2, 3), ksi [MPa}
Stress Category For 20,000 to For up to For up to For over
(4)
(See Table 3) 100 000 cycles 500 000 cycles 2 000 000 cycles 2 000 000 cycles
A 50 [345] 29 [200] 24 [165] 24 [165]
B 39 [269] 23 [159] 16 [110] 16 [110]
B’ 31 [214] 18 [124] 11 [76] 11 [76]
C 28 [193] 16 [110] 10 [69] 9 [62]
(6) (6)
12 [83] 11 [76]
D 22 [152] 13 [90] 8 [55] 5 [34]
(5)
E 17 [117] 10 [69] 6 [41] 2.5 [17]
E’ 12 [83] 7 [48] 4 [28] 1.5 [10]
F 12 [83] 9 [62] 7 [48] 6 [41]
Notes:
(1) Structure types where a single fracture in a member will cause collapse.
(2) The range of stress is defined as the algebraic difference between the maximum stress and the minimum stress. Tension stress is considered to have
the opposite algebraic sign from compression stress.
(3) Stress range numbers in this table are reduced from those in Table 4, as a suggested safety factor for nonredundant load path structures. (see 5.1 and
5.2.)
(4) Structures under 20 000 cycles are to be considered statically loaded.
(5) Partial length welded cover plates shall not be used on flanges more than 0.8 in. [20 mm] thick for nonredundant load path structures.
(6) At toe of transverse- stiffener welds on girder webs or flanges.
5.2.2 Redundant and Non-redundant Load Path Structures. Redundant structures are
those with multi-load paths where a single fracture in a member cannot lead to collapse. A non-
redundant load path member is one where a fracture will cause collapse.
5.2.3 Stress Range. Stress range is defined as the algebraic difference between the maximum
stress and minimum stress.
5.2.4 Load Cycles. The number of cycles of maximum stress range to be considered in the
design shall be selected from Table 4 or 5 unless otherwise specified.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 27 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
5.3 Combined Unit Stresses and Toughness Requirements
5.3.1 In the case of axial stress combined with bending, the allowable unit stress of each kind
shall be governed by the requirements of 5.1 and 5.2, and the maximum combined unit stresses
calculated shall be limited in accordance with the requirements of the applicable contract.
5.3.2 Charpy V-Notch Impact Requirements. Main load-carrying weldments which

operate below 32°F [0°C] subject to tensile stress shall require a supplemental impact properties
12
specification.
5.4 Filler Metals. For joining materials, the filler metals found in Table 6 shall be used for Joint
Class I, II, and III welds.
Table 6
Base Metal and Filler Metal Relationship
Base Metal Tensile Level(1)
ksi [MPa] Filler Metal Tensile Series(2, 3)
E60XX, E70XX, E70XX-X
45 to 75 [310 to 517] E80XX-X, E90XX-X
E100XX-X, E110XX-X
E80XX-X, E90XX-X
75 to 85 [517 to 586]
E100XX-X, E110XX-X
E90XX-X, E100XX-X
85 to 95 [586 to 655]
E110XX-X
95 to 105 [655 to 725] E100XX-X, E110XX-X
105 to 115 [725 to 793] E110XX-X
Notes:
(1) For joining base metals of different strength levels, the lower strength level shall
determine the filler metal tensile series.
(2) Filler metals for use with welding processes other than SMAW shall be of the same
filler metal tensile series as indicated above for each base metal strength level.
(3) Filler metals of alloy groups B3, B3L, B4L, B5, B6, B6L, B7, B7L, B8, B8L, or B9 in
AWS A5.5, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc
Welding, or appropriate specifications, are not prequalified for use in the as-welded
condition.
5.5 Lap Joints.
5.5.1 The minimum overlap of parts in stress-carrying lap joints shall be five times the
thickness of the thinner part. Unless lateral deflection of the parts is prevented, they shall be
connected by at least two transverse lines of fillet, plug, or slot welds or by two or more
longitudinal fillet or slot welds.
5.5.2 If longitudinal fillet welds are used alone in lap joints of end connections, the length of
each fillet weld shall be no less than the perpendicular distance between them. The transverse
spacing of the welds shall not exceed 16 times the thickness of the connected thinner part, unless
suitable provision is made (as by intermediate plug or slot welds) to prevent buckling or
separation of the parts. The longitudinal fillet welds may be either at the edges of the member or
in slots.
12. A suggested source of information: Barson, J.M. The Development of AASHTO Fracture-Toughness
Requirements for Bridge Steels, American Iron and Steel Institute, Washington D.C., February 1975.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 28 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
5.5.3 When fillet welds in holes or slots are used, the clear distance from the edge of the hole
or slot to the adjacent edge of the part containing it, measured perpendicular to the direction of
stress, shall be no less than five times the thickness of the part, nor less than two times the width
of the hole or slot. The strength of the part shall be determined from the critical net section of the
base metal.
5.6 Corner and T-Joints. Corner and T-joints that are to be subjected to bending about an axis
parallel to the joint shall have their welds arranged to avoid concentration of tensile stress at the
root of any weld.
5.7 Prohibited Types of Joints and Welds in Dynamic Applications. The joints and welds
listed in (1) through (6) below are not permitted unless an analysis is made to ensure the base
metal and weld joint stresses meet the ranges and allowable maximums permitted by this
specification.
(1) Butt joints not fully welded throughout their cross-section
(2) Groove welds made from one side only:
(a) Without any backing
(b) With backing, other than steel, that has not been qualified in accordance with 5.2
(c) Stress between components for built-up members designed primarily for axial stress
(3) Intermittent groove welds
(4) Intermittent fillet welds
(5) Bevel-grooves and J-grooves in butt joints for other than the horizontal position
(6) Plug and slot welds on primary tension members.
5.8 Combinations of Welds. If two or more of the general types of welds (groove, fillet, plug,
or slot) are combined in a single joint, their allowable capacity shall be computed with reference
to the axis of the group in order to determine the allowable capacity of the combination.
However, such methods of adding individual capacities of welds do not apply to fillet welds
reinforcing groove welds (see 5.17.4).
5.9 Welds In Combination with Rivets and Bolts. Rivets and bolts in combination with welds
shall not be considered as sharing the stress, and the welds shall be provided to carry the entire
stress for which the connection is designed. Bolts or rivets used in assembly may be left in place if
their removal is not specified. If bolts are to be removed, the plans should indicate whether or not
holes should be filled, and in what manner.
5.10 Fillet Weld Details
5.10.1 Fillet welds which support a tensile force that is not parallel to the axis of the weld shall
not terminate at corners of parts or members, but shall be returned continuously, full size, around
the corner for a length equal to twice the weld size where such return can be made in the same
plane. Boxing shall be indicated on design and detail drawings.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 29 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
5.10.2 Fillet welds deposited on the

opposite sides of a common plane of contact
between two parts shall be interrupted at a
corner common to both welds (see Figure 5).
5.11 Eccentricity of Connections
5.11.1 Eccentricity between intersecting

parts and members shall be avoided insofar as
practicable.
5.11.2 In designing welded joints,

adequate provision shall be made for bending
stresses due to eccentricity, if any, in the
disposition and section of base metal parts and Figure 5 — Fillet Welds on Opposite Sides
in the location and types of welded joints. of a Common Plate of Contact
5.11.3 For members having symmetrical

cross-sections, the connection welds shall be arranged symmetrically about the axis of the
member, or proper allowance shall be made for unsymmetrical distribution of stresses.
5.11.4 For axially stressed angle members, the center of gravity of the connecting welds shall
lie between the line of the center of gravity of the angle's cross-section and the centerline of the
connected leg. If the center of gravity of the connecting weld lies outside of this zone, the total
stresses, including those due to the eccentricity from the center of gravity of the angle, shall not
exceed those permitted by this specification.
5.12 Connections or Splices in Tension and Compression Members. Connections or splices

of tension or compression members which are made by groove welds shall have complete joint
penetration. Connections or splices made with fillet or plug welds, except as noted in 5.13, shall
be designed for an average of the calculated stress and the strength of the member, but not less
than 75 percent of the strength of the member; or if there is repeated application of load, the
maximum stress or stress range in such connection or splice shall not exceed the fatigue stress
permitted by this specification.
5.13 Connections or Splices in Compression Members with Milled Joints. If members

subject to compression only are spliced, and full-milled bearing is provided, the splice material and
its welding shall be arranged, unless otherwise stipulated by the applicable general specifications,
to hold all parts in alignment and shall be proportioned to carry 50 percent of the computed stress
in the member. Where such members are in full-milled bearing on base plates, there shall be
sufficient welding to hold all parts securely in place.
5.14 Connections of Components of Built-Up Members. When a member is built up of two or

more pieces, the pieces shall be connected along their longitudinal joints by sufficient weld to
make the pieces act in unison.
5.15 Transition of Thicknesses or Widths at Butt Joints.
5.15.1 Butt joints between parts having unequal thicknesses and subject to tensile stress shall
have a smooth transition between the offset surfaces at a slope of no more than 1 in 2.5 with the
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 30 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
surface of either part. The transition may be accomplished by sloping weld surfaces, by
chamfering the thicker part, or by a combination of the two methods (see Figure 6).
General Notes:
1. Groove may be of any permitted or qualified type and detail.
2. Transition slopes shown are the maximum permitted.
Figure 6 — Transition of Thickness at Butt Joints of Parts Having Unequal Thickness

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 31 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
5.15.2 In butt joints between parts of unequal thickness that are subject only to shear or
compressive stress, transition of thickness shall be accomplished, as specified in Figure 6, when
the offset between surfaces at either side of the joint is greater than the thickness of the thinner
part connected. When the offset is equal to or less than the thickness of the thinner part
connected, the face of the weld shall be sloped no more than 1 in 2.5 from the surface of the
thinner part or shall be sloped to the surface of the thicker part if this requires a lesser slope with
the following exception: Truss member joints and beam and girder flange joints shall be made with
smooth transitions of the type specified in 5.15.1.
5.15.3 Butt joints between parts having unequal width and subject to tensile stress shall have a
smooth transition between offset edges at a slope of no more than 1 in 2.5 with the edge of either
part or shall be transitioned with a 2.0 ft [0.6 m] minimum radius tangent to the narrower part of
the center of the butt joints (see Figure 7). A radius transition is required for steel having yield
strength equal to or greater than 90 ksi [620 MPa].
R = 2 ft [0.6 m]
R = 2 ft [0.6 m] R = 2 ft [0.6 m]
3/4in. [19 mm] 11/32 in

[19 mm] 3/32 in
[2 mm]
6 ft 4 ft 2 ft
[1.8 m] [1.2 m] [0.6 m]
DETAIL OF CUT
Butt Joint
General Note: Mandatory for steels with a yield strength greater
than or equal to 90 ksi [620 MPa]. Optional for other steels.
Figure 7 — Transition of Width at Butt Joints of Parts Having Unequal Width
5.16 Girders and Beams.
5.16.1 Connections or splices in beams or girders when made by groove welds shall have
complete joint penetration welds. Connections or splices made with fillet or plug welds shall be
designed for the average of the calculated stress and the strength of the member, but no less than
75 percent of the strength member. Where there is repeated loading, the maximum stress or
stress range shall not exceed the fatigue stress permitted by this specification.
5.16.2 Splices between sections of rolled beams or built-up girders shall preferably be made in
a single transverse plane. Shop splices of webs and flanges in built-up girders, made before the
webs and flanges are joined to each other, may be located in a single transverse plane or multiple
transverse planes, but the fatigue stress provisions of this specification shall apply.
5.16.3 Stiffeners
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 32 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
5.16.3.1 Intermittent fillet welds used to connect stiffeners to beams and girders shall
comply with the following requirements:
(1) Minimum length of each weld shall be 1 1/2 in. [38 mm].
(2) Welds shall be made on both sides of the joint for at least 25 percent of its length.
(3) Maximum end-to-end clear spacing of welds shall be 12 times the thickness of the
thinner part, but not more than 6 in. [150 mm].
(4) Each end of stiffeners, connected to a web, shall be welded on both sides of the joint.
5.16.3.2 Stiffeners, if used, should be arranged in pairs on opposite sides of the web.
Stiffeners may be welded to tension or compression flanges. The fatigue stress or stress ranges at
the points of attachment to the tension flange or tension portions of the web shall comply with the
fatigue requirements of this specification. Transverse fillet welds may be used for welding
stiffeners to flanges.
5.16.3.3 If stiffeners are used on only one side of the web, they shall be welded to the
compression flange.
5.16.3.4 Unless otherwise specified, fillet welds connecting attachments shall start or
terminate not less than the weld size from the end of the joint. For stiffeners on girders, the weld
joining the stiffeners to the web shall start or terminate not less than four times the thickness of
the web from the face of the flange.
5.16.4 Girders (built-up I-sections) should be made with one plate in each flange, i.e., without
cover plates. The unsupported projection of a flange shall be no more than permitted by the
applicable specification. The thickness and width of a flange may be varied by butt joint welding
parts of different thickness or width with transitions conforming to the requirements of 5.15.
5.16.5 Cover Plates. Cover plates should be limited to one on any flange. The maximum
thickness of cover plates on a flange (total thickness of all cover plates if more than one is used)
shall be not greater than one and one-half times the thickness of the flange to which the cover
plate is attached. The thickness and width of a cover plate may be varied by welding of butt joint
parts of different thickness or width on transitions conforming to the requirements of 5.15. Such
plates shall be assembled and welds ground smooth before being attached to the flange. The
width of a cover plate, with recognition of dimensional tolerance allowed by ASTM A6,
Specification for General requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars
for Structural Use, shall allow suitable space for a fillet weld along each edge of the joint between
the flange and the cover plate.
5.17 Effective Weld Areas, Lengths, and Throats
5.17.1 Groove Welds. The effective area shall be the effective weld length multiplied by the
weld size.
5.17.1.1 The effective weld length for any groove weld, square or skewed, shall be the
width of the part joined, perpendicular to the direction of stress.
5.17.1.2 The weld size of a complete joint penetration groove weld shall be the thickness
of the thinner part joined. No increase is permitted for weld reinforcement.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 33 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
5.17.1.3 The weld size of a partial joint penetration groove weld shall be the depth of
bevel less 1/8 in. [3 mm] for grooves having a groove angle less than 60 degrees but no less than
45 degrees at the root of the groove, when made by shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) or
submerged arc welding (SAW), or when made in the vertical or overhead welding positions by
gas metal arc welding (GMAW) or flux cored arc welding (FCAW).
The weld size of a partial joint penetration groove weld shall be the depth of bevel,
without reduction, for grooves:
(1) having a groove angle of 60 degrees or greater at the root of the groove when made by
any of the following welding processes: SMAW, SAW, GMAW, FCAW, or EGW; or
(2) having a groove angle not less than 45 degrees at the root of the groove when made in
flat or horizontal positions by GMAW or FCAW.
5.17.1.4 The effective weld size for flare groove welds, when filled flush to the surface of
a bar, or 90 degree bend in a formed section, or a rectangular tube, shall be as shown in Table 7.
Table 7
Effective Weld Sizes of Flare Groove Welds
Flare-Bevel-Groove Welds Flare-V-Groove Welds

(1) (1, 2)
0.312R 0.5R
Notes:
(1) R = radius of outside surface.
(2) Use 0.375R for GMAW (except short circuiting transfer) process when R is 0.5 in. [13 mm]
or greater.
(1) When required by the Engineer, test sections shall be used to verify that the effective
weld size is consistently obtained.
(2) For a given set of procedural conditions, if the Contractor has demonstrated consistent
production of larger effective weld sizes than those shown in Table 7, the Contractor may
establish such larger effective weld sizes by qualifications.
(3) Qualifications required by (2) shall consist of sectioning the radiused member, normal
to its axis, at mid-length and at the ends of the weld. Such sectioning shall be made on a number
of combinations of material sizes representative of the range used by the Contractor in
construction or as required by the Engineer.
5.17.2 Fillet Welds. The effective area shall be the effective weld length multiplied by the
effective throat. Stress in a fillet weld shall be considered as applied to this effective area, for any
direction of applied load.
5.17.2.1 The effective length of a fillet weld shall be the overall length of the full-size fillet,
including boxing. No reduction in effective length shall be made for either the start or crater of
the weld if the weld is full size throughout its length.
5.17.2.2 The effective length of a curved fillet weld shall be measured along the center line
of the effective throat. If the weld area of a fillet weld in a hole or slot computed from this length
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 34 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
is greater than the area found from 5.17.3, then this latter area shall be used as the effective area
of the fillet weld.
5.17.2.3 The minimum effective length of a fillet weld shall be at least four times the
nominal size, or the size of the weld shall be considered not to exceed one fourth its effective
length.
5.17.2.4 The effective throat shall be the minimum distance, minus any convexity between
the weld root and the face of a fillet weld.
5.17.3 Plug and Slot Welds. The effective area shall be the nominal area of the hole or slot
in the plane of the faying surface.
5.17.4 Combination Weld. The effective throat of a combination partial joint penetration
groove weld and a fillet weld shall be the minimum distance from the joint root to the weld face of
the fillet weld minus 1/8 in. [3 mm] (see Figure 8).
E E E
Note: The effective throat of a weld (E in this figure) is the minimum distance from the root of
the joint to its face, with or without a deduction of 1/8 in. [3mm].
Figure 8 — Combination of Bevel Groove and Fillet Weld Profiles
5.18 Fillers. (see Figures 9 and 10)
5.18.1 Fillers may be used in the following:

(1) Splicing parts of different thicknesses
(2) Connections that, due to existing geometric alignment, must accommodate offsets to
permit simple framing.
5.18.2 A filler less than 1/4 in. [6 mm] thick shall not be used to transfer stress but shall be
kept flush with the welded edges of the stress-carrying part. The sizes of welds along such edges
shall be increased over the required sizes by an amount equal to the thickness of the filler (see
Figure 9).
5.18.3 Any filler 1/4 in. [6 mm] or more in thickness shall extend beyond the edges of the
splice plate or connecting material. It shall be welded to the part on which it is flat fitted, and the
joint shall be of sufficient strength to transmit the splice plate or connection material stress applied
to the surface of the filler as an eccentric load. The welds joining the splice plate or connection
material to the filler shall be sufficient to transmit the splice plate or connection material stress and
shall be long enough to avoid overstressing the filler along the toe of the weld (see Figure 10).
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 35 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Figure 9 — Fillers Less Than 1/4 in. [6 mm] Thick
Figure 10 — Fillers 1/4 in. [6 mm] or Thicker
5.19 Partial Joint Penetration Groove Weld Restrictions. Partial joint penetration groove
welds subject to tension normal to their longitudinal axis shall not be used where design criteria
indicate cyclic loading could produce fatigue failure (see Table 3).
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 36 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
5.20 Joint Qualification.
5.20.1 Joints meeting the requirements of the applicable provisions of Sections 4, 5 and 6 of
this specification are designated as prequalified.
5.20.1.1 Joints meeting these requirements may be used without performing the joint
welding procedure qualification tests prescribed in 7.2.
5.20.1.2 The joint welding procedure for all joints welded by short circuiting transfer gas
metal arc welding shall be qualified by tests prescribed in 7.2.
5.20.2 Joint details may depart from the details prescribed in 5.23 and 5.24 only if the
Contractor submits the proposed joint welding procedures to the Engineer for approval and at the
Contractor's expense demonstrates their adequacy in conformance to the requirements of 7.2 of
this specification and their conformance with applicable provisions of Section 5.
5.21 Details of Fillet Welds.
5.21.1 The details of fillet welds made by SMAW, SAW, GMAW (except short circuiting
transfer), or FCAW to be used without joint welding procedure qualifications are listed in
5.21.1.1 through 5.21.1.6 and detailed in Figure 11.
1/16 in.
[2 mm]
BASE METAL LESS THAN BASE METAL 1/4 in. [6 mm]

1/4 in. [6 mm] THICK OR MORE IN THICKNESS
Figure 11 — Details for Prequalified Fillet Welds
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 37 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
5.21.1.1 The minimum fillet weld size, except for fillet welds used to reinforce groove
welds, shall be as shown in Table 8. In both cases, the minimum size applies if it is sufficient to
satisfy design requirements.
Table 8
Minimum Fillet Weld Size for Prequalified Joints
Base metal thickness of Minimum size of
Thicker part (T)* in. [mm] fillet weld* in. [mm]
T ≤ 1/4 [6] 1/8 [3]
1/4 [6] < T ≤ 1/2 [13] 3/16 [5]
1/2 [13] < T ≤ 3/4 [19] 1/4 [6]
3/4 [19] < T 5/16 [8]
Note:
*The weld size need not exceed the thickness of the thinner part joined.
5.21.1.2 The minimum fillet weld size to develop to the full strength of the thinner
member joined is given in Table 9. These values are only applicable when the filler metal is
properly matched with the base metal; the welds are loaded statically and the thinner plate or leg
is fillet welded continuously on both sides (double fillet weld).
Table 9
(1)
Minimum Size of Full Strength Double Fillet Welds
(2) (2)
Full Strength Full Strength
Thinner Plate Weld Thinner Plate Weld
(3, 4) (3, 4)
Thickness (t) (S = 3/4 t) Thickness (t) (S = 3/4 t)
in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
1/4 6 3/16 5 1 3/8 35 1 1/32 26
5/16 8 15/64 6 1 1/2 38 1 1/8 29
3/8 10 9/32 7 1 5/8 41 1 7/32 31
7/16 11 21/64 8 1 3/4 44 1 5/16 33
1/2 13 3/8 10 2 51 1 1/2 38
9/16 14 27/64 11 2 1/8 54 1 19/32 40
5/8 16 15/32 12 2 1/4 57 1 11/16 43
3/4 19 9/16 14 2 3/8 60 1 25/32 45
7/8 22 21/32 16 2 1/2 64 1 7/8 48
1 25 3/4 19 2 5/8 67 1 31/32 50
1 1/8 29 27/32 22 2 3/4 70 2 1/16 52
1 1/4 32 15/16 24 3 76 2 1/4 57
Notes:
(1) The fillet sizes listed do not take into consideration the effective throat thickness obtainable from
GMAW, FCAW and SAW processes.
(2) Filler metal properties match with base metal strength
(3) S = Leg size of fillet.
(4) Metric sizes based on formula, not equivalents of inch units.
5.21.1.3 The maximum fillet weld size detailed along edges of material shall be the
following:
(1) the thickness of the base metal, for metal less than 1/4 in. [6 mm] thick as detailed in
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 38 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Figure 11A, or
(2) 1/16 in. [2 mm] less than the thickness of base metal, for metal 1/4 in. [6 mm] or more
in thickness, as detailed in Figure 11B, unless the weld is designated on the drawing to be built
out to obtain full throat thickness. In the as-welded condition, the distance between the edge of
the base metal and the toe of the weld may be less than 1/16 in. [2 mm], provided the weld size is
clearly verifiable.
5.21.1.4 Fillet welds in holes or slots in lap joints may be used to transfer shear or to
prevent buckling or separation of lapped parts. These fillet welds may overlap, subject to the
provisions in 5.17.2.2. Fillet welds in holes or slots are not to be considered as plug or slot welds.
5.21.1.5 Fillet welds may be used in skewed T-joints having a dihedral angle of not less
than 60 degrees nor more than 135 degrees (see Figures 11C and 11D).
5.21.1.6 The minimum length of an intermittent fillet weld shall be 1 1/2 in. [38 mm], and
spacing shall not exceed 12 times the thickness of thinner part, but not more than 6 in. [150 mm].
5.21.1.7 Minimum spacing and dimensions of holes or slot when fillet welding is used
shall conform to the requirements of 5.22.
5.22 Details of Plug and Slot Welds.
5.22.1 The details of plug and slot welds made by the SMAW, GMAW, (except short
circuiting transfer), or FCAW process are listed in 5.22.2 through 5.22.8 and may be used without
performing the joint welding procedure qualification prescribed in 7.2.
5.22.2 The minimum diameter of the hole for a plug weld shall be no less than the thickness
of the part containing it plus 5/16 in. [8 mm], preferably rounded to the next greater odd 1/16 in.
[2 mm]. The maximum diameter shall equal the minimum diameter plus 1/8 in. [3 mm], or 2 1/4
times the thickness of the member, whichever is greater.
5.22.3 The minimum center-to-center spacing of plug welds shall be four times the diameter
of the hole.
5.22.4 The length of the slot for a slot weld shall not exceed ten times the thickness of the part
containing it. The width of the slot shall be no less than the thickness of the part containing it plus
5/16 in. [8 mm], preferably rounded to the next greater odd 1/16 in. [2 mm]. The maximum
width shall equal the minimum width plus 1/8 in. [3 mm] or 2 1/4 times the thickness of the
member, whichever is greater.
5.22.5 Plug and slot welds are not permitted in quenched and tempered steels.
5.22.6 The ends of the slot shall be semicircular or shall have the corners rounded to a radius
not less than the thickness of the part containing it, except those ends which extend to the edge of
the part.
5.22.7 The minimum spacing of lines of slot welds in a direction transverse to their length
shall be four times the width of the slot. The minimum center-to-center spacing in a longitudinal
direction of any line shall be two times the length of the slot.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 39 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
5.22.8 The depth of filling of plug or slot welds in metal 5/8 in. [16 mm] thick, or less, shall be
equal to the thickness of the material. In metal over 5/8 in. [16 mm] thick, it shall be at least one-
half the thickness of the material, but no less than 5/8 in. [16 mm].
5.23 Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds.
5.23.1 Complete joint penetration groove welds made by SMAW, SAW, GMAW (except
short circuiting transfer), or FCAW in butt, corner, and T-joints which may be used without
performing the joint welding procedure qualification test prescribed in 7.2 are detailed in Figure
12 and are subject to the limitations specified in 5.23.2 through 5.23.5.
Complete joint penetration groove welds made by short circuiting transfer gas metal arc
welding shall be qualified by the welding procedure qualification tests prescribed in 7.2.
5.23.2 Dimensional Tolerances. Dimensions of groove welds specified in 5.23.1 may vary
on design or detailed drawings within the limits or tolerances shown in the "As Detailed" column
in Figure 12. J- and U-grooves may be prepared before or after assembly.
5.23.3 Groove preparations detailed for prequalified shielded metal arc welded joints may be
used for prequalified gas metal arc or flux cored arc welding.
5.23.4 Joint Root Openings. Joint root openings may vary as noted in 5.23 and 5.24.
However, for automatic or machine welding using the FCAW, GMAW, and SAW processes, the
maximum root opening variation (minimum to maximum opening as fit-up) may not exceed 1/8 in.
[3 mm]. Variations greater than 1/8 in. [3 mm] shall be locally corrected prior to automatic or
machine welding.
5.23.5 Corner Joints. For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or
both members, provided the basic groove configuration is not changed and adequate edge
distance is maintained to support the welding operations without excessive melting.
5.24 Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds.
5.24.1 Partial joint penetration groove welds made by SMAW, SAW, GMAW (except short
circuiting transfer), or FCAW in butt, corner, and T-joints which may be used without performing
the joint welding procedure qualification tests prescribed in 7.2 are detailed in Figure 13 and are
subject to the limitations specified in 5.24.2.
5.24.1.1 Definition. Except as provided in Figure 12, groove welds without steel backing
welded from one side, and groove welds welded from both sides, but without backgouging, are
considered partial joint penetration groove welds. Skewed T-joint welds, with angles smaller than
60 degrees, are considered to be partial joint penetration groove welds (see Figure 11).
5.24.1.2 All partial joint penetration groove welds made by short circuiting transfer gas
metal arc welding shall be qualified by the joint welding procedure qualification tests prescribed in
7.2.
5.24.2 Dimensional Tolerances. Dimensions of groove welds specified in 5.23.1 may vary
on design or detailed drawings within the limits or tolerances shown in the "As Detailed" column
in Figure 13. J- and U-grooves may be prepared before or after assembly.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 40 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
5.24.3 Minimum Weld Size. The minimum weld size of partial joint penetration square-,
single-, or double-V-, bevel-, J-, and U-groove welds shall be as shown in Table 10.
Shop or working drawings shall specify the depth of bevel (S) applicable for the weld size (E)
required for the welding process and position of welding to be used (see Figure 13).
5.24.4 Groove preparations detailed for prequalified shielded metal arc welded joints may be
used for prequalified GMAW or FCAW.
Table 10
Minimum Weld Size for
Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds
Base Metal Thickness
of Thicker Part Joined, Minimum Weld Size*,
in. [mm] in.[mm]
1/8 [3] to 3/16 [5] inclusive 1/16 [1.6]
Over 3/16 [5] to 1/4 [6] inclusive 1/8 [3]
Over 3/4 [19] to 1 1/2 incl. 5/16 [8]
Over 1 1/2 [38] to 2 1/4 [57] inclusive 3/8 [10]
Over 2 1/4 [57] to 6 [150] inclusive 1/2 [13]
Over 6 [150] 5/8 [16]
Note:
*Except the weld size need not exceed the thickness of the thinner part.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 41 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Square-groove
weld (1)
Butt joint (B)
Corner Joint (C)
Base Metal Thickness, Groove Preparation

Gas
in. [mm] Tolerances, Permitted Shielding
(U = Unlimited) in. [mm]
Welding Joint Root Welding for
Process Designation T1 T2 Opening As Detailed As Fit-Up Positions FCAW Notes
B-L1a 1/4 [6] max — R = T1 +1/16 [2], +1/4 [6],
All — N
-0 [0] -1/16 [2]
SMAW
C-L1a 1/4 [6] max U R = T1 +1/16 [2], +1/4 [6],
All — —
-0 [0] -1/16 [2]
GMAW B-L1a-GF 3/8 [10] max — R = T1 +1/16 [2], +1/4 [6], Not
All A, N
FCAW -0 [0] -1/16 [2] required
(A)
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135° to 180° provided that the basic joint configuration (groove angle, root
face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Square-groove weld (1)

Butt joint (B)

Permitte Gas
in. [mm] Tolerances,
Root d Shielding
Welding Joint Opening, Welding for
Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] As Detailed As Fit-Up Positions FCAW Notes
B-L1b 1/4 [6] max — R = T1/2 +1/16 [2], +1/16 [2],
SMAW All — C, N
-0 [0] -1/8 [3]
GMAW B-L1a-GF 3/8 [10] max — R = 0 to +1/16 [2], +1/16 [2], Not
All A, C, N
FCAW 1/8 [10] -0 [0] -1/8 [3] required
SAW B-L1-S 3/8 [10] max — R=0 ±0 +1/16 [2], -0 Flat — N
SAW B-L1a-S 5/8 [16] max — R=0 ±0 +1/16 [2], -0 Flat — C, N
(B)
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Figure 12 — Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 42 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc

T-joint joint (T)
Corner joint (C)

Permitte Gas
in. [mm] Tolerances,
Root d Shielding
Welding Joint Opening, Welding for
Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] As Detailed As Fit-Up Positions FCAW Notes
TC-L1b 1/4 [6] max U R = T1/2 +1/16 [2], +1/16 [2],
SMAW All — C, J
-0 [0] -1/8 [3]
GMAW TC-L1a-GF 3/8 [10] max U R = 0 to +1/16 [2], +1/16 [2], Not
All A, C, J
FCAW 1/8 [10] -0 [0] -1/8 [3] required
SAW TC-L1-S 3/8 [10] max U R=0 ±0 +1/16 [2], -0 Flat — C, J
(C)
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to 1/4T1, but
need not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm]. Groove welds in corner and T-joints of cyclically loaded structures shall be reinforced with fillet welds
equal to 1/4T1, but need not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm].
Single V-groove weld (2) Tolerances,

Butt Joint (B) in. [mm] for R; ° for α
As Detailed As Fit-Up
R = +1/16 [2] +1/4 [6],

-0 [0] -1/16 [2]
α = +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
Base Metal Thickness, Groove Preparation Gas

in. [mm] Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint (U = Unlimited) Root Opening, Welding for
Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] Groove Angle Positions* FCAW Notes
B-U2a U — R = 1/4 [6] α = 45° All —
SMAW R = 3/8 [10] α = 30° F, V, OH — N
R = 1/2 [13] α = 20° F, V, OH —
GMAW B-U2a-GF U — R = 3/16 [5] α = 30° F, V, OH Required
FCAW R = 1/4 [6] α = 30° F, V, OH Not Req. A, N
R = 3/8 [10] α = 45° F, V, OH Not Req.
SAW B-L2a-S 2 [50] max — R = 1/4 [6] α = 30° F —
N
SAW B-U2-S U — R = 5/8 [16] α = 20° F —
(D)
Figure 12 (continued) — Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 43 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Single V-groove weld (2) Tolerances,

Corner Joint (C) in. [mm] for R; ° for α
R = +1/16 [2] +1/4 [6],
-0 [0] -1/16 [2]
α = +10°, -0° +10°, -5°

C-U2a U U R = 1/4 [6] α = 45° All —
SMAW R = 3/8 [10] α = 30° F, V, OH — Q
R = 1/2 [13] α = 20° F, V, OH —
GMAW C-U2a-GF U U R = 3/16 [5] α = 30° F, V, OH Required A
FCAW R = 3/8 [10] α = 30° F, V, OH Not Req.
A, Q
R = 1/4 [6] α = 45° F, V, OH Not Req.
SAW C-L2a-S 2 [50] max U R = 1/4 [6] α = 30° F —
Q
SAW C-U2-S U U R = 5/8 [16] α = 20° F —
(E)
Note Q: For corner and T-joints, the member orientation may be changed provided the groove angle is maintained as specified.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 44 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Single V-groove weld (2)

Butt joint (B)

in. [mm] Root Opening, Tolerances, Permitte Gas
(U = Unlimited) Root Face, in. [mm] for R & f; ° for α d Shielding
Welding Joint in. [mm] Welding for
Process Designation T1 T2 Groove Angle As Detailed As Fit-Up Positions FCAW Notes
R = 0 to 1/8 [3] R = +1/16 [2], R = +1/16
SMAW B-U2 U — f = 0 to 1/8 [3] -0 [2], -1/8 [3] All — C, N
α = 60°
f = +1/16 [2], f = Not
R = 0 to 1/8 [3] -0 Limited
GMAW Not A, C,
B-U2-GF U — f = 0 to 1/8 [3] All
FCAW α = +10°, -0° α = +10°, -5° required N
α = 60°
R=0
Over 1/2 [13] to
— f = 1/4 [6] max
1 [25]
α = 60°
R =+1/16 [2],
R=0 R=±0
Over 1 [25] to 0
SAW B-L2c-S — f = 1/2 [13] max f = +0, -f Flat — C, N
1 1/2 [38] f = ±1/16 [2]
α = 60° α = +10°, -0°
α = +10°, -5°
Over 1 1/2 [38] R=0
to — f = 5/8 [16] max
2 [50] α = 60°
(F)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 45 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Single V-groove weld (2)

Corner joint (C)

(U = Unlimited) Root Face, in. [mm] for R or f; ° for α d Shielding
R = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], -0 +1/16 [2],
-1/8 [3] C, J,
SMAW C-U2 U U All —
f = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], -0 Not Limited R
α = 60° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
R = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], -0 +1/16 [2],
GMAW -1/8 [3] Not A, C,
C-U2-GF U U All
FCAW f = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], -0 Not Limited required J, R
α = 60° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
R=±0
R=0 +1/16 [2], -0
f = +0, -1/4 C, J,
SAW C-U2b-S U U f = 1/4 [6] max ±1/16 [2] Flat —
[6] R
α = 60° +10°, -5°
α = +10°, -0°
(G)
Note R: The orientation of two members in the joints may vary from 45° to 135° for corner joints and from 45° to 90° for T-joints, provided that the
basic joint configuration (grove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 46 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Double V-groove weld (3) Tolerances,

Butt Joint (B) in. [mm] for R, f; or Spacer; ° for
α
R = ±0 +1/4 [6], -0
f = ±0 +1/16 [2],
-0
α = +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
Spacer = ±0 +1/16 [2],

-0

in. [mm] Root Opening Root Face Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint (U = Unlimited) (R), (f), Groove Welding for
Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] in. [mm] Angle Positions FCAW Notes
1/4 [6] 0 to 1/8 [3] α = 45° All —
U 0 to 1/8 [3] α = 30°
SMAW B-U3a — 3/8 [10] F, V, OH — C, M, N
Spacer = 1/8R
1/2 [13] 0 to 1/8 [3] α = 20° F, V, OH —
U 0 to 1/4 [6] α = 20°
SAW B-U3a-S — 5/8 [16] F — C, M, N
Spacer = 1/4R
(H)
Note M: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shall be no less than one-fourth of the
thickness of the thinner part joined.
* F = Flat, OH = Overhead, V = Vertical
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 47 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Double V-groove weld (3) For B-U3c-S only

Butt Joint (B) in. [mm]
T1 S1
>2 [51] to ≤2 1/2 [63] 1 3/8 [35]
>2 1/2 [63] to ≤3 [75] 1 3/4 [44]
>3 [75] to ≤3 5/8 [92] 2 1/8 [54]
>3 5/8 [92] to ≤4 [102] 2 3/8 [60]
>4 [102] to ≤4 3/4 [121] 2 3/4 [70]
>4 3/4 [121] to ≤5 1/2 [140] 3 1/4 [83]
>5 1/2 [140] to ≤6 1/4 [159] 3 3/4 [95]
For T1 >6 1/4 [159], or T1 ≤2 [50]
S1 = 2/3(T1 - 1/4 [6])
R = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], +1/16 [2], C, M,
SMAW B-U3b All —
-0 -1/8 [3] N
U — f = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], Not Limited
GMAW -0 Not A, C.
B-U3-GF All
FCAW α = ß = 60° +10°, -0° +10°, -5° Required M, N
R=0 R=±0 +1/16 [2], -0

f = 1/4 [6] max f = +0, -f ±1/16 [2] C, M,
SAW B-U3c-S U — Flat —
α = 60° α = +10°, -0° +10°, -5° N
To find S1 see table above; S2 = T1 - (S1+ f)

(I)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 48 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Single-bevel-groove weld (4) Tolerances,

Butt Joint (B) in. [mm] for R; ° for α
R = +1/16 [2] +1/4 [6],

-0 [0] -1/16 [2]
α = +10°, -0° +10°, -5°

Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] Groove Angle Positions FCAW Notes
B-U4a U — R = 1/4 [6] α = 45° All —
SMAW Br, N
R = 3/8 [10] α = 30° All —
GMAW B-U4a-GF U — R = 3/16 [5] α = 30° All Required
FCAW α = 45° A, Br,
R = 1/4 [6] All Not Req.
N
R = 3/8 [10] α = 30° F Not Req.
(J)
Note Br: Dynamic load application limits these joints to the horizontal welding position.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 49 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Single-bevel-groove weld (4) Tolerances

T-Joint (T) in. [mm] for R; ° for α
Corner Joint (C) As Detailed As Fit-Up
NOTE J R = +1/16 [2] +1/4 [6],
NOTE V -1/16 [2]
-0 [0]
α = +10°, -0° +10°, -5°

R = 1/4 [6] α = 45° All —
SMAW TC-U4a U U J, Q, V
R = 3/8 [10] α = 30° F, V, OH —
R = 3/16 [5] α = 30° All Required
GMAW α = 30° A, J,
TC-U4a-GF U U R = 3/8 [10] F Not Req.
FCAW Q, V
R = 1/4 [6] α = 45° All Not Req.
R = 3/8 [10] α = 30°
SAW TC-U4a-S U U F — J, Q, V
R = 1/4 [6] α = 45°
(K)
Note Q: For corner and T-joints, the member orientation may be changed provided the groove angle is maintained as specified.
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration is not
changed and adequate edge distance is maintained to support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.
* F = Flat, OH = Overhead, V = Vertical
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 50 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Single-bevel-groove weld (4)

Butt joint (B)

R = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], +1/16 [2], Br, C,
SMAW B-U4b U — All —
-0 -1/8 [3] N
GMAW f = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], -0 Not Limited Not A, Br,
B-U4b-GF U — α = 45° +10°, -0° +10°, -5° All
FCAW required C, N
(L)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 51 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc

T-joint (T),
Corner Joint (C)

R = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], +1/16 [2], C, J,
SMAW TC-U4b U U All —
-0 -1/8 [3] R, V
f = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], Not Limited A, C,
GMAW -0 Not
TC-U4b-GF U U All J, R,
FCAW α = 45° +10°, -0° +10°, -5° required
V
R=0 ±0 +1/4 [6], -0
C, J,
SAW TC-U4b-S U U f = 1/4 [6] max +0, -1/8 [3] +1/16 [2] Flat —
R, V
α = 60° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
(M)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 52 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Double-bevel-groove weld (5)

Butt Joint (B)

(U = Unlimited) Root Face (f), in. [mm] for R & f; ° for α & ß d Shielding
R = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], +1/16 [2],
-0 -1/8 [3]
f = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], -0 Not Limited Br, C,
SMAW B-U5a U — All —
M, N
α = 45° α + ß: +10°, α + ß: +10°,
ß = 0° to 15° -0° -5°
R = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], +1/16 [2],
-0 -0
A, Br,
GMAW f = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], +1/16 [2], Not
B-U5-GF U — All C, M,
FCAW -0 -0 required
N
α = 45° α + ß: +10°, α + ß: +10°,
ß = 0° to 15° -0 -0
(N)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 53 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc

T Joint (T)
Corner Joint (C)

(U = Unlimited) Root Face (f), in. [mm] for R & f; ° for α d Shielding
U, preferably C, J,
SMAW TC-U5b 5/8 [16] or U R = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], +1/16 [2], All — M, R,
thicker -0 -1/8 [3] V
f = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], Not Limited
U, preferably -0 A, C,
GMAW Not
TC-U5-GF 5/8 [16] or U α = 45° +10°, -0° +10°, -5° All J, M,
FCAW required
thicker R, V
R=0 ±0 +1/16 [2], -0
C, J,
f = 3/16 [5] +0, -3/16 [5] ±1/16
SAW TC-U5-S U U Flat M, R,
max
V
α = 60° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
(O)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 54 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Double-bevel-groove weld (5) Tolerances,

Butt Joint (B), T-Joint (T), Corner Joint (C) in. [mm] for R, f, & Spacer; ° for α
BACKGOUGE R = ±0 +1/4 [6], -0

f = +1/16 [2], ±1/16 [2]
-0
α = +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
NOTE J NOTE V
Spacer = +1/16 +1/8 [3], -0
[2], -0
Spacer same steel as base metal.

U
Spacer = Br, C,
B-U5b — 1/4 [6] 0 to 1/8 [3] α = 45° All —
1/8 x R M, N
SMAW C, J, M,
U 1/4 [6] 0 to 1/8 [3] α = 45° All —
R, V
TC-U5a Spacer = U
1/4 x R Flat, C, J, M,
3/8 [10] 0 to 1/8 [3] α = 30° —
Overhead R, V
(P)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 55 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Single U-groove weld (6) Tolerances,

Butt Joint (B), Corner Joint (C) in. [mm] for R, f, & r; ° for α
R = +1/16 [2], +1/16 [2],

-0 -1/8 [3]
f = ±1/16 [2] Not Limited
α = +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
r = +1/8 [3], -0 +1/8 [3], -0
Groove Radius (r) = 1/4 in [6 mm] for all

0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] α = 45° All —
B-U6 U U C, N
0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] α = 20° F, OH —
SMAW
0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] α = 45° All —
C-U6 U U C, J, R
0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] α = 20° F, OH —
B-U6-GF U U 0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] α = 20° All Not Req. A, C, N
GMAW
FCAW 1/8 [3] α = 20° A, C, J,
C-U6-GF U U 0 to 1/8 [3] All Not Req.
R
(Q)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 56 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Double U-groove weld (7) Tolerances,

Butt Joint (B) in. [mm] for R, f, & r; ° for α
For B-U7 and B-U7-GF

R = +1/16 [2], +1/16 [2],
-0 -1/8 [3]
f = ±1/16 [2] Not Limited
α = +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
r = +1/4 [6], -0 ±1/16 [2]
Groove Radius (r) = 1/4 in. [6 mm] for all For B-U7-S
R = ±0 +1/16 [2], -0
f = +0, -1/4 [6] ±1/16 [2]

0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] α = 45° All — C, M, N
SMAW B-U7 U —
0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] α = 20° F, OH — C, M, N
GMAW 0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] α = 20° Not A, C, M,
B-U7-GF U — All
FCAW Required N
0 1/4 [6]
SAW B-U7-S U — α = 20° F — C, M, N
max.
(R)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 57 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Single J-groove weld (8) Tolerances,

R = +1/16 [2], +1/16 [2],

-0 -1/8 [3]
f = +1/16 [2], Not Limited
Groove Radius (r) = 3/8 in. [10 mm] for all -0
α = +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
r = +1/4 [6], -0 ±1/16 [2]

1/8 [3] α = 45° Br, C,

SMAW B-U8 U — 0 to 1/8 [3] All —
N
GMAW 1/8 [3] α = 30° A, Br,
B-U8-GF U — 0 to 1/8 [3] All Not Req.
FCAW C, N
(S)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 58 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Single J-groove weld (8) Tolerances,

T-Joint (T), Corner Joint (C) in. [mm] for R, f, & r; ° for α
Groove Radius (r) = 3/8 in. [10 mm] for all
R = +1/16 [2], +1/16 [2],
-0 -1/8 [3]
-0
α = +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
r = +1/4 [6], -0 ±1/16 [2]

0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] α = 45° All — C, J,
SMAW TC-U8a U U
0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] α = 30° F, OH — R, V
GMAW Not A, C,
TC-U8a-GF U U 0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] α = 30° All
FCAW Required J, R, V
(T)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 59 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Double J-groove weld (9) Tolerances,

R = +1/16 [2], +1/16 [2],

-0 -1/8 [3]
Groove Radius (r) = 3/8 in. [10 mm] for all -0
α = +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
r = +1/8 [3], -0 ±1/16 [2]

0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] α = 45° Br, C,
SMAW B-U9 — All —
M, N
U
GMAW 1/8 [3] α = 30° Not A, Br,
B-U9-GF — 0 to 1/8 [3] All
FCAW Required C, M, N
(U)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 60 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Double J-groove weld (9) Tolerances,

T-Joint (T), Corner Joint (C) in. [mm] for R, f, & r; ° for α
Groove Radius (r) = 3/8 in. [10 mm] for all
R = +1/16 [2], +1/16 [2],
-0 -1/8 [3]
-0
α = +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
r = +1/8 [3], -0 ±1/16 [2]

0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] α = 45° All — C, J, M,
SMAW TC-U9a U U
0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] α = 30° F, OH — R, V
GMAW Not A, C, J,
TC-U9a-GF U U 0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] α = 30° All
FCAW Required M, R, V
(V)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 61 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc

Butt Joint (B)
REINFORCEMENT 1/32 in. [0.8 mm]

to 1/8 in. [3 mm].
NO TOLERANCE

Permitte
in. [mm] Tolerances, d Weld
Welding Joint Root Opening, Welding Size (E),
Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] As Detailed As Fit-Up Positions in. [mm] Notes
R = 0 to +1/16 [2], ±1/16 [2] T1 - 1/32
B-P1a 1/8 [3] — All B
1/16 [2] -0 [1]
SMAW
R = T1/2 +1/16 [2], ±1/16 [2]
B-P1c 1/4 [6] max — All T1/2 B
minimum -0
(A)
Note B: Joint is welded from one side only.

Butt Joint (B)
E1 + E2 MUST NOT EXCEED 3T1/4
REINFORCEMENT 1/32 in. [0.8 mm] to

1/8 in. [3 mm]. NO TOLERANCE
REINFORCEMENT 1/32 in. [0.8 mm] to
1/8 in. [3 mm]. NO TOLERANCE
Base Metal Thickness, Groove Preparation Total

in. [mm] Tolerances, Permitte Weld
(U = Unlimited) in. [mm] d Size
Welding Joint Root Opening, Welding (E1 + E2),
Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] As Detailed As Fit-Up Positions in. [mm] Notes
R = T1/2 +1/16 [2], ±1/16 [2]
SMAW B-P1b 1/4 [6] max — All 3T1/4 C2
minimum -0
(B)
Note C2: Root need not be gouged before welding other side.
Figure 13 — Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 62 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Single-V-groove weld (2)

Butt Joint (B)
Corner Joint (C)

in. [mm] Root Opening, Tolerances, Permitte
(U = Unlimited) Root Face (f), in. [mm] for R & f; ° for α d Weld
Welding Joint in. [mm] Welding Size (E),
Process Designation T1 T2 Groove Angle As Detailed As Fit-Up Positions in. [mm] Notes
R=0 ±0 +1/16 [2], -0
B, E,
SMAW BC-P2 1/4 [6] min U f = 1/8 [3] min ±1/16 [2] ±1/16 [2] All S
Q2
α = 60° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
R=0 ±0 +1/16 [2], -0
GMAW A, B,
BC-P2-GF 1/4 [6] min U f = 1/8 [3] min ±1/16 [2] ±1/16 [2] All S
FCAW E, Q2
α = 60° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
R=0 ±0 +1/16 [2], -0
B, E,
SAW BC-P2-S 7/16 [11] min U f = 1/4 [6] min ±1/16 [2] ±1/16 [2] Flat S
Q2
α = 60° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
(C)
Note E: Minimum weld size (E) as shown in Table 10; S as specified on drawings.
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.
Figure 13 (continued) — Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 63 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Double-V-groove weld (3)

Butt Joint (B)

in. [mm] Root Opening, Tolerances Permitte
(U = Unlimited) Root Face (f), in. [mm] for R & f; ° for α d Weld
R=0 +1/16 [2], -0 ±1/16 [2]
E, Mp,
SMAW B-P3 1/2 [13] min — f = 1/8 [3] min -0 ±1/16 [2] All S1 + S2
Q2
α = 60° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
R=0 +1/16 [2], -0 ±1/16 [2] A, E,
GMAW
B-P3-GF 1/2 [13] min — f = 1/8 [3] min -0 ±1/16 [2] All S1 + S2 Mp,
FCAW
α = 60° +10°, -0° +10°, -5° Q2
R=0 ±0 +3/16 [5], -0
E, Mp,
SAW B-P3-S 3/4 [19] min — f = 1/4 [6] min -0 ±1/16 [2] Flat S1 + S2
Q2
α = 60° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
(D)
Note Mp: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, provided these conform to Note E. Also, the weld size (E), less any reduction,
applies individually to each groove.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 64 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc

Butt Joint (B)
T-Joint (T)
Corner Joint (C)
Base Metal Thickness, Groove Preparation Weld

in. [mm] Root Opening, Tolerances, Size
(U = Unlimited) Root Face (f), in. [mm] for R & f; ° for α Permitted (E),
Welding Joint in. [mm] Welding in.
Process Designation T1 T2 Groove Angle As Detailed As Fit-Up Positions [mm] Notes
R=0 +1/16 [2], -0 ±1/16 [2} B, E,
(1)
SMAW BTC-P4 U U f = 1/8 [3] min -0 ±1/16 [2] All S J2, Q2,
α = 45° +10°, -0° +10°, -5° V,
R=0 +1/16 [2], -0 ±1/16 [2} F, H S A, B,
GMAW (1)
S - 1/8 E, J2,
BTC-P4-GF 1/4 [6] min U f = 1/8 [3] min -0 ±1/16 [2] V, OH
FCAW [3] Q2, V,
α = 45° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
R=0 ±0 +3/16 [5], -0 B, E,
)
SAW BTC-P4-S 7/16 [11] min U f = 1/4 [6] min +U, -0 ±1/16 [2] Flat S J2, Q2,
α = 60° +10°, -0° +10°, -5° V,
(E)
Note J2: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to 1/4T1, but not
exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm].
(1) For flat and horizontal positions, f = +U, -0
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 65 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc

Butt Joint (B)
T-Joint (T)
Corner Joint (C)

in. [mm] Root Opening, Tolerances, Effective
(U = Unlimited) Root Face (f), in. [mm] for R & f; ° for α Permitted Throat
Welding Joint in. [mm] Welding (E)
R=0 +1/16 [2], -0 +1/8 [3],
E, J2,
-1/16 [2]
(1) (S1 + S2) L,
SMAW BTC-P5 5/16 [8] min U f = 1/8 [3] min U ±1/16 [2] All
-1/4 [6] Mp,
Q2, V
α = 45° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
R=0 +1/16 [2], -0 +1/8 [3],
-1/16 [2] F, H S1 + S2 A, E,
GMAW f = 1/8 [3] min U
(1)
±1/16 [2] J2, L,
BTC-P5-GF 1/2 [13] min U
FCAW (S1 + S2) Mp,
V, OH Q2, V
α = 45° +10°, -0° +10°, -5° -1/4 [6]
R=0 ±0 +1/16 [2], -0 E, J2,

f = 1/4 [6] min +U, -0 ±1/16 [2] L,
SAW BTC-P5-S 3/4 [19] min U Flat S1 + S2
α = 60° +10°, -0° +10°, -5° Mp,
Q2, V
(F)
Note L: Butt and T-joints are not prequalified for dynamically loaded structures.
(1) For flat and horizontal positions, f = +U, -0
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 66 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Single-U-groove weld (6)

Butt Joint (B)
Corner Joint (C)

(U = Unlimited) Root Face (f), in. [mm] for R, f, & r; ° for α d Weld
R=0 +1/16 [2], ±1/16 [2]
f = 1/32 [1] -0 ±1/16 [2]
B, E,
SMAW BC-P6 1/4 [6] min U min +1/4 [6], -0 ±1/16 [2] All S
Q2
r = 1/4 [6] +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
α = 45°
R=0 +1/16 [2], ±1/16 [2]
GMAW f = 1/8 [3] min -0 ±1/16 [2] A, B,
BC-P6-GF 1/4 [6] min U All S
FCAW r = 1/4 [6] +1/4 [6], -0 ±1/16 [2] E, Q2
α = 20° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
R=0 +1/16 [2], +3/16 [5], -0
f = 1/8 [3] min -0 ±1/16 [2] B, E,
SAW BC-P6-S 7/16 [11] min U Flat S
r = 1/4 [6] +1/4 [6], -0 ±1/16 [2] Q2
α = 20° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
(G)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 67 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Double-U-groove weld (7)

Butt Joint (B)

R=0 +1/16 [2], -0 +1/8 [3],
1/2 [13] min -1/16 [2]
E, Mp,
SMAW B-P7 (for bridges 5/8 — f = 1/8 [3] min +U, -0 ±1/16 [2] All S1 + S2
Q2
[16] min) r = 1/4 [6] +1/4 [6], -0 ±1/16 [2]
α = 45° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
R=0 +1/16 [2], -0 +1/8 [3],
1/2 [13] min -1/16 [2] A, E,
GMAW
B-P7-GF (for bridges 5/8 — f = 1/8 [3] min +U, -0 ±1/16 [2] All S1 + S2 Mp,
FCAW
[16] min) r = 1/4 [6] +1/4 [6], -0 ±1/16 [2] Q2
α = 20° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
R=0 +1/16 [2], -0 +1/16 [2], -0
3/4 [19] min
f = 1/4 [6] min +U, -0 ±1/16 [2] E, Mp,
SAW B-P7-S (for bridges 7/8 — Flat S1 + S2
r =1/4 [6] +1/4 [6], -0 ±1/16 [2] Q2
[22] min)
α = 20° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
(H)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 68 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Single-J-groove weld (8)

Butt Joint (B)
T-Joint (T)
Corner Joint (C)

Welding Joint in. [mm] Welding Size (E)
TC-P8 R=0 +1/16 [2], -0 +1/8 [3],
(T and -1/16 [2]
Inside 1/4 [6] min U f = 1/8 [3] min +U, -0 ±1/16 [2] All S
Corner r = 3/8 [10] +1/4 [6], -0 ±1/16 [2]
Joints) α = 45° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
E, J2,
SMAW
BC-P8 R=0 +1/16 [2], -0 +1/8 [3], Q2, V
(Butt and -1/16 [2]
Outside 1/4 [6] min U f = 1/8 [3] min +U, -0 ±1/16 [2] All S
Corner r = 3/8 [10] +1/4 [6], -0 ±1/16 [2]
Joints) α = 30° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
TC-P8-GF R=0 +1/16 [2], -0 +1/8 [3],
(T and -1/16 [2]
Inside 1/4 [6] min U f = 1/8 [3] min +U, -0 ±1/16 [2] All S
Corner r = 3/8 [10] +1/4 [6], -0 ±1/16 [2]
Joints) α = 45° +10°, -0° +10°, -5° A, E,
GMAW
J2,
FCAW BC-P8-GF R=0 +1/16 [2], -0 +1/8 [3], Q2, V
(Butt and -1/16 [2]
Outside 1/4 [6] min U f = 1/8 [3] min +U, -0 ±1/16 [2] All S
Corner r = 3/8 [10] +1/4 [6], -0 ±1/16 [2]
Joints) α = 30° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
TC-P8-S R=0 ±0 +1/16 [2], -0
(T- and f = 1/4 [6] min +U, -0 ±1/16 [2]
7/16 [11] min U r = 1/2 [13] +1/4 [6], -0 ±1/16 [2] Flat S
inside
corner) α = 45° +10°, -0° +10°, -5° E, J2,
SAW
R=0 ±0 +1/16 [2], -0 Q2, V
C-P8-S
f = 1/4 [6] min +U, -0 ±1/16 [2]
(Outside 7/16 [11] min U Flat S
r = 1/2 [13] +1/4 [6], -0 ±1/16 [2]
corner) α = 20° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
(I)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 69 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Double-J-groove weld (9)

Butt Joint (B)
T-Joint (T)
Corner Joint (C)
NOTE J2

R=0 +1/16 [2], -0 +1/8 [3]
BTC-P9
-1/16 [2] E, J2,
(butt, T-, &
SMAW 1/2 [13] min U f = 1/8 [3] min +U, -0 ±1/16 [2] All S1 + S2 Mp,
inside corner
r = 3/8 [10] +1/4 [6], -0 ±1/16 [2] Q2, V
joints)
α = 45° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
BTC-P9-GF R=0 +1/16 [2], -0 +1/8 [3]
A, E,
(butt, T-, & -1/16 [2]
GMAW J2,
outside 1/2 [13] min U f = 1/8 [3] min +U, -0 ±1/16 [2] All S1 + S2
FCAW Mp,
corner r = 3/8 [10] +1/4 [6], -0 ±1/16 [2]
Q2, V
joints) α = 30° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
C-P9-S R=0 ±0 +1/16 [2], -0
(inside f = 1/4 [6] min +U, -0 ±1/16 [2]
3/4 [19] min U Flat S1 + S2
corner r = 1/2 [13] +1/4 [6], -0 ±1/16 [2]
joints) α = 45° +10°, -0° +10°, -5° E, J2,
Mp,
C-P9-S R=0 ±0 +1/16 [2], -0 Q2, V
(outside f = 1/4 [6] min +U, -0 ±1/16 [2]
SAW 3/4 [19] min U Flat S1 + S2
corner r = 1/2 [13] +1/4 [6], -0 ±1/16 [2]
joints) α = 20° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
R=0 ±0 +1/16 [2], -0
E, J2,
f = 1/4 [6] min +U, -0 ±1/16 [2]
T-P9-S 3/4 [19] min U Flat S1 + S2 Mp,
r = 1/2 [13] +1/4 [6], -0 ±1/16 [2]
Q2
α = 45° +10°, -0° +10°, -5°
(J)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 70 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Flare-bevel-groove weld (10)

Butt Joint (B)
T-Joint (T)
Corner Joint (C)

Process Designation T1 T2 T3 Bend Radius
(1)
As Detailed As Fit-Up Positions in. [mm] Notes
R=0 +1/16 [2], -0 +1/8 [3]
3/16 -1/16 [2]
T1 J2,
SMAW BTC-P10 [5] U f = 3/16 [5] +U, -0 +U, -1/16 [2] All 5/8T1
min Q2, Z
min min +U, -0 +U, -0
C = 3T1/2 min
R=0 +1/16 [2], -0 +1/8 [3]
3/16 -1/16 [2]
GMAW BTC-P10- T1 A, J2,
[5] U f = 3/16 [5] +U, -0 +U, -1/16 [2] All 5/8T1
FCAW GF min Q2, Z
min min +U, -0 +U, -0
C = 3T1/2 min
R=0 ±0 +1/8 [3]
1/2 1/2 -1/16 [2]
J2,
SAW T-P10-S [13] [13] NA f = 1/2 [13] +U, -0 +U, -1/16 [2] Flat 5/8T1
Q2, Z
min min min +U, -0 +U, -0
C = 3T1/2 min
(K)
Note Z: Weld size (E) is based on joints welded flush.
(1) For cold formed (A500) rectangular tubes, C dimension is not limited.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 71 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
6. Workmanship
6.1 General
6.1.1 All applicable paragraphs of this section shall be observed in the production and
inspection of weldments produced by any process under this specification.
6.1.2 All items of equipment for welding and cutting shall be designed, manufactured and
maintained in such condition as to enable qualified welders, welding operators, and tack welders
to follow qualified welding procedures and attain the results required by this specification.
6.1.3 Welding shall not be done when the ambient temperature is lower than 0°F [-18°C].
Note: 0°F [-18°C] does not mean the ambient environmental temperature, but the temperature in
the immediate vicinity of the weld. The ambient environmental temperature may be below 0°F [-
18°C], but a heated structure or shelter around the area being welded could maintain the
temperature adjacent to the weldment at 0°F [-18°C] or higher. In addition, welding shall not be
done when surfaces are wet, exposed to rain, snow, or high wind, or when welders are otherwise
exposed to inclement weather conditions.
6.1.4 The sizes and lengths of welds shall not be less than nor substantially more than those
specified by design requirements and detailed drawings. The location of welds shall not be
changed unless approved by the Engineer.
6.2 Preparation of Materials
6.2.1 Surfaces and edges to be welded shall be smooth, uniform, and free from fins, tears,
cracks, and other defects which would adversely affect the quality or strength of the weld.
Surfaces to be welded and surfaces adjacent to them shall be free from scale, slag, rust, grease, or
other foreign material that will prevent proper welding or produce objectionable fumes.
6.2.2 Oxyfuel gas cutting may be employed in the preparation of base metal for welding
provided that all scale, slag, gouges or other irregularities on the cut surface are removed by
mechanical means after cutting.
6.2.3 Backing strips, rings, and spacer blocks shall be of the same general type of material as
the base metal or as specified by the design drawings or approved welding procedure
specification.
6.3 Assembly
6.3.1 The parts to be joined by fillet welds shall be brought into as close contact as
practicable. The root opening shall not exceed 3/16 in. [5 mm] except in cases involving either
shapes or plates 3 in. [75 mm] or greater in thickness if, after straightening and in assembly, the
root opening cannot be closed sufficiently to meet this tolerance. In such cases, a maximum root
13
opening of 5/16 in. [8 mm] is acceptable provided a backing weld or suitable backing is used. If
the separation is greater than 1/16 in. [2 mm], the leg of the fillet weld shall be increased by the
amount of the root opening or the contractor shall demonstrate that the required effective throat
13. Backing may be of flux, glass tape, iron powder, or similar materials; by means of shielded metal arc welding
root passes deposited with low hydrogen electrodes or other arc welding processes.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 72 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
has been obtained.

+10°
α=
-5° The separation between faying surfaces of
plug and slot welds, and of butt joints landing
on a backing, shall not exceed 1/16 in. [2 mm].
±1/16 in.
f=
[2 mm] The use of fillers is prohibited except as
specified on the drawings or as specially
approved by the Engineer.
±1/16 in.
R=
[2 mm]
6.3.2 The parts to be joined by partial joint
penetration groove welds parallel to the length
of the member, shall be brought into as close
contact as practicable. The root opening
between parts shall not exceed 3/16 in. [5 mm]
except in cases involving rolled shapes or
plates 3 in. [75 mm] or greater in thickness if,
+10° after straightening and in assembly, the root
α=
-5° opening cannot be closed sufficiently to meet
this tolerance. In such cases, a maximum root
opening of 5/16 in. [8 mm] is applicable
±1/16 in.
f=
[2 mm]
provided a backing weld or suitable backing is
used and the final weld meets the requirements
for weld size.
+1/4 in. [6 mm]
R=
-1/16 in. [2 mm] 6.3.3 Parts to be joined by groove welded
butt joints shall be carefully aligned. Where
the parts are effectively restrained against
bending due to eccentricity in alignment, an
offset not exceeding 10 percent of the
thickness of the thinner part joined, but in no
case more than 1/8 in. [3 mm], shall be
α=
+10° permitted as a departure from the theoretical
-5°
alignment. In correcting misalignment in such
cases, the parts shall not be drawn in to a
greater slope than 0.5 in 12. Measurement of
f is NOT
LIMITED
offset shall be based upon the center line of
parts unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
+1/16 in. [2 mm]
R= 6.3.4 With the exclusion of electroslag and
-1/8 in. [3 mm]
electrogas welding, and with the exception of
6.3.4.1, the dimensions of the cross section of
Figure Legend and Note: the groove welded joints which vary from
α = Groove Angle Tolerance those shown on the detail drawings by more
R = Root Opening Tolerance than the following tolerances shall be referred
f = Root Face Tolerance to the Engineer for approval or correction.
(1) The groove configurations are for
illustration only. 6.3.4.1 Root openings wider than those
Figure 14 — Workmanship Tolerances in permitted in Figure 14, but not greater than
Assembly of Groove Welded Joints(1) twice the thickness of the thinner part or 3/4
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 73 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
in. [19 mm], whichever is less, may be corrected by welding to acceptable dimensions prior to
joining the parts by welding.
6.3.4.2 Root openings larger than those correctable in accordance with 6.3.4.1 may be
corrected by welding only with the approval of the Engineer.
6.3.5 Grooves produced by gouging shall be in conformance to the groove profile dimensions
as specified in Figures 12 and 13.
6.3.6 Members to be welded shall be brought into correct alignment and held in position by
bolts, clamps, wedges, guy lines, struts, and other suitable devices, or by tack welds until welding
has been completed. The use of jigs and fixtures is recommended where practicable. Suitable
allowances shall be made for warpage and shrinkage.
6.3.7 All tack welds shall be made using the same grade welding electrode or filler metal as
the final weld, unless otherwise specified and qualified by testing. Tack welds may be
incorporated in the final weld if they have been deposited by qualified welders using an approved
welding procedure specification, and after visual examination shows them to be of acceptable
quality. Multiple-pass tack welds shall be deposited by a cascaded sequence.
6.3.8 Welding procedures with complete joint penetration where the joint is welded from both
sides shall require either backgouging of the underside of the root pass before welding the second
side or it shall be demonstrated by actual welding tests that backgouging may be omitted without
detriment to the weld. Backgouging shall require removal of the underside of the root pass to
sound metal as indicated by liquid penetrant or magnetic particle inspection. Welding procedures
that omit backgouging shall be tested to demonstrate that the resulting welds are consistently free
of weld defects as indicated by close examination of weld cross-sections and side-bend tests.
6.3.9 Each pass of deposited weld metal shall be thoroughly cleaned using slagging picks,
grinding wheels, or wire brushes. Pneumatic chippers may be used provided they do not peen or
distort the weld.
6.3.10 Preheating and interpass temperature control shall ensure that the full thickness of the
weld joint preparation and adjacent base metal are within the temperature range specified by the
welding procedure specification.
6.3.11 When required by contract plans or specifications, welded assemblies may be stress
relieved by heat treating (see Section 8).
7. Qualification.
Part A — General Qualification Requirements
7.1 Approved Procedures
7.1.1 Welding procedures which conform in all respects to the applicable provisions of
sections 4, 5 and 6 and Table 11 of this specification shall be considered as prequalified and are
exempt from tests otherwise required for qualification.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 74 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Table 11
Maximum Allowable Chemical Composition Limits for Steels Prequalified for
Welding
(1)
Material Class Class I Class II Class III Class IV Class V
Maximum Ultimate Tensile
Strength, ksi [MPa] 80 [550] 85 [585] 90 [620] 100 [690] 135 [930]
Maximum Carbon
(2)
Equivalent 0.38 0.48 0.63 0.54 0.74
Carbon 0.23 0.30 0.24 0.26 0.22
Manganese 0.90 1.35 1.35 1.65 1.50
Phosphorus 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.035 0.035
Sulfur 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05
Silicon 0.60 0.60 0.90 0.30 0.90
Chemical Nickel 1.25 0.25(4) 1.50
(4)
Composition Chromium 1.00 0.20 2.00
Maximums Molybdenum 0.25 0.060(4) 0.65
(all in weight Vanadium(5) 0.10(3) 0.15 0.08
%) Titanium 0.07 0.07 0.10
Residual Quantities Only
Zirconium 0.15 0.15 0.15
Niobium 0.04(3) (4) (4)
(Columbium)
Copper 1.00 0.35(4) 0.50
(4)
Boron Residual 0.0005 0.006
Note:
(1) The only prequalified materials in Class V are ASTM A514, A517, and A709.
(2) Carbon Equivalent (CE) = %C + %Mn/6 + %Mo/4 + %Cr/5 + %Ni/15 + %V/5
(3) Maximum for niobium + vanadium = 0.10
(4) Residual quantities only, Nb is not specified.
(5) Caution: The filler metal or base metal should not exceed 0.05% if the welds are to be stress relieved because a decrease in
fracture toughness may result.
7.1.2 Steels having weldability within a given material class as defined in Table 11 shall be
considered prequalified.
7.1.3 The welding procedure to be used shall be prepared by the Manufacturer, fabricator, or
contractor as a Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and shall be available to those authorized
to examine it.
7.1.4 AWS B2.1 Standard Welding Procedure Specifications which conform in all respects to
the applicable provisions of Sections 4, 5, and 6 of this specification and signed by the fabricator
shall be considered approved and are exempt from tests otherwise required from qualification.
7.2 Other Procedures. Except for procedures exempt in 7.1, joint welding procedures employed
in executing contract work under this specification shall be qualified to meet this specification as
prescribed in Part B of this section. The customer should accept evidence of previous
qualification of the joint welding procedures to be employed.
7.3 Welders, Welding Operators, and Tack Welders
7.3.1 All welders, welding operators, and tack welders employed under this specification shall
have been qualified by the tests prescribed in Part C, D, and E of this section. Welders who are
currently certified within the requirements of AWS QC-7, Standard for Certified Welders, shall be
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 75 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
considered qualified within the limits of the applicable WPS and exempt from tests otherwise
required for qualification. The customer should accept evidence of previous AWS or ASME
qualification of the welders, welding operators, and tack welders to be employed.
7.3.2 Radiographic examination of a welder's or welding operator's qualification test plate may
be made in lieu of the guided bend tests prescribed in Part C and D of this section.
7.4 Qualification Responsibility. Each Manufacturer or contractor shall conduct the tests
required by this specification to qualify the welding procedures and the welders, welding
operators, and tack welders who will apply these procedures, except as permitted in 7.1.
Part B — Welding Procedure Qualification
7.5 General. Welding procedures developed from this specification shall be considered to have
been qualified by the tests prescribed herein subject to the limitation of variables in 7.6. Any
requalifications or new qualifications shall be made in conformance to the requirements of this
specification. The welding procedure specification used in production shall comply in all respects
with the procedure qualification record within the limitations of 7.6.
7.6 Limitation of Variables
7.6.1 When it is necessary to establish a welding procedure by qualification as required by 7.2

or contract specifications, the following rules apply, and the procedure shall be recorded by the
Manufacturer or contractor as a welding procedure specification.
7.6.1.1 Qualification of a welding procedure established with carbon or low-alloy steels

not listed in 7.6.1.2 and having minimum specified yield strength less than 50 ksi [345 MPa], shall
be considered as a procedure qualification for welding any other carbon or low-alloy steel or
combination having a minimum specified yield strength equal to or less than that of the base metal
used in the test.
7.6.1.2 Qualification of a welding procedure established with ASTM A242, A441, A537
Grade A, A572 Grade 50, A588, API 5LX Grade 42, or ABS Grade AH, DH or EH shall be
considered as procedure qualification for welding the other steels of this group, combinations of
them, or carbon or low-alloy steels having a lower minimum specified yield strength.
7.6.1.3 Qualification of a welding procedure established with carbon or low-alloy steel

having a minimum specified yield strength greater than 50 ksi [345 MPa] shall qualify the
procedure for welding only base metals of the same material specification and grade or type
having the same minimum specified yield strength as the base metal tested. An exception to this is
appropriate when a reduction in yield strength occurs due to an increase in material thickness.
For example, a procedure qualified with a 1 in. [25 mm] thick, 100 ksi [690 MPa] yield strength
base metal also qualifies for a 3 in. [75 mm] thick, 90 ksi [620 MPa] yield strength base metal of
the same material specification.
7.6.1.4 Qualification of a welding procedure established with a combination of carbon or

low-alloy steels of different minimum specified yield strengths, one of which is greater than 50 ksi
[345 MPa], shall qualify the procedure for welding that high yield strength base metal to any other
of those base metals having a minimum specified yield strength equal to or less than that of the
lower strength base metal used in the test.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 76 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
7.6.2 The changes set forth in the following schedule shall be considered essential changes in a
welding procedure and shall require establishing a new procedure by qualification. When a
combination of welding processes is used, the variables applicable to each process shall apply.
(1) Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW)
(a) A change increasing filler metal strength level; e.g., a change from E70XX to E80XX
[E48XX to E55XX], but not vice versa.
(b) A change from a low-hydrogen-type electrode to a non-low-hydrogen type of
electrode, but not vice versa.
(c) An increase in the diameter of the electrode used, greater than that called for in the
procedure specification.
(d) A change of more than 15 percent above or below the specified mean arc voltage and
amperage for each size electrode used.
(e) For a specified groove, a change of more than ±25 percent in the specified number of
passes. If the area of the groove is increased, it is also permissible to increase the number of
passes in proportion to the increased area.
(f) A change in position in which welding is done as defined in 5.9.
(g) A change in the type of groove, e.g., a change from a V- to a U-groove.
(h) A change in the shape of any one type of groove involving: a decrease in the included
angle of the groove, a decrease in the root opening of the groove, an increase in the root face of
the groove, or the omission, but not the inclusion, of backing material.
(i) A decrease of more that 25°F [15°C] in the minimum specified preheat temperature.
(j) In the case of vertical welding, a change from the progression specified for any pass
from upward to downward, or vice versa.
(2) Submerged Arc Welding (SAW)
(a) A change in electrode and flux combination not covered by AWS A5.17, Specification
for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding, or AWS A5.23,
Specification for Low Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding.
(b) A change increasing filler metal strength level.
14
(c) A change in electrode diameter when using an alloy flux.
(d) A change in the number of electrodes used; e.g., single electrode to multiple
electrodes, or vice versa.
(e) A change in the type of current (ac or dc) or polarity.
(f) A change of more than 10 percent above or below the specified mean amperage for
each size electrode used.
(g) A change of more than 7 percent above or below the specified mean arc voltage for
(h) A change of more than 15 percent above or below the specified mean travel speed.
14. An alloy flux is defined as a flux upon which the alloy content of the weld metal is largely dependent.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 77 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
(i) A change of more than ±10 percent or 1/8 in. [3 mm], whichever is greater, in the
longitudinal spacing of the arcs.
(j) A change of more than ±10 percent or 1/16 in. [2 mm], whichever is greater, in the
lateral spacing of the arcs.
(k) A change of more than ±10 percent in degrees in the angular position of any parallel
electrode.
(l) A change in the angle of electrodes in mechanized or automatic welding of more than
±3 degrees in the direction of travel and ±5 degrees normal to the direction of travel
(m) For a specified groove, a change of more than ±25 percent in the specified number of
(n) A change in position in which welding is done as defined in 5.9.
(o) A change in the type of groove; e.g., a change from a V- to a U-groove.
(p) A change in the shape of any one type of groove involving: a decrease in the included
angle of the groove, a decrease in the root opening of a groove, an increase in the root face of a
groove, or the omission, but not the inclusion, of backing material.
(q) A decrease of more than 25°F [15°C] in the minimum specified preheat temperature.
(r) An increase in the diameter of the electrode used, greater than that called for in the
procedure specification.
(3) Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW)
(a) A change in electrode type and method of shielding not covered by AWS A5.18,
Specification for Carbon Steel Filler Metals for Gas Shielded Arc Welding, or AWS A5.28,
Specification for Low Alloy Steel Filler Metals for Gas Shielded Arc Welding.
(c) A change in electrode diameter.
(e) A change from a single gas to any other single gas or to a mixture of gases or a change
in specified percentage composition of gas mixture not covered by AWS A5.18, Specification for
Carbon Steel Filler Metals for Gas Shielded Arc Welding, or AWS A5.28, Specification for Low
Alloy Steel Filler Metals for Gas Shielded Arc Welding.
(g) A change of more than 7 percent above or below the specified mean arc voltage for
(i) An increase of 25 percent or more or a decrease of 10 percent or more in the rate of
flow of shielding gas or mixture.
(j) For a specified groove, a change of more than 25 percent in the specified number of
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 78 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc

(k) A change in the position in which welding is done as defined in 5.9.
(l) A change in the type of groove; e.g., a change from a V- to U-groove.
(m) A change in the shape of any one type of groove involving: a decrease in the included
groove, or the omission, but not the inclusion, of backing material.
(n) A decrease of more than 25°F [15°C] in the minimum specified preheat temperature.
(o) In vertical welding, a change from the progression specified for any pass from upward
to downward, or vice versa.
(p) A change in type of welding current (ac or dc), polarity, or mode of metal transfer
across the arc.
(4) Flux Cored Arc Welding (FCAW)
(a) A change in electrode type and method of shielding not covered by AWS A5.20,
Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding, or AWS A5.29,
Specification for Low Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding.
(c) An increase in the diameter of electrode used over that called for in the procedure
specification.
(e) A change from a single gas to any other single gas or to a mixture of gases or a change
in specified percentage composition of gas mixture not covered by AWS A5.20, Specification for
Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding, or AWS A5.29, Specification for Low
Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding.
(g) A change of more that 7 percent above or below the specified mean arc voltage for
(i) An increase of 25 percent or more or a decrease of 10 percent or more in the rate of
flow of shielding gas or mixture.
(j) For a specified groove, a change of more than ±25 percent in the specified number of
(k) A change in the position in which welding is done as defined in 5.9.
(l) A change in the type of groove; e.g., a change from a V- to a U-groove.
(m) A change in the shape of any one type of groove involving: a decrease in the included
groove or the omission, but not the inclusion, of backing material.
(n) A decrease of more than 25°F [15°C] in the minimum specified preheat temperature.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 79 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
(o) In vertical welding, a change from the progression specified for any pass from upward
to downward, or vice versa.
(p) A change in type of welding current (ac or dc), polarity or mode of metal transfer
across arc.
(5) Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW)
(a) A change in the joint design, e.g., a change from a U- to a V-groove.
(b) The deletion of a backing.
(c) A change in the base metal thickness beyond the range qualified in Table 13.
(d) The addition or deletion of consumable inserts.
(e) A change in position in which welding is done as defined in 5.9.
(f) A decrease of more than 25°F [15°C] in the minimum specified preheat temperature.
(g) The omission of trailing shielding gas.
(h) The omission of back shielding gas.
(i) A change in shielding gas from a single gas to any other single gas or to a mixture of
gases, or a change in specified nominal percentage composition of gas mixture.
(j) Addition or deletion of pulsing welding current.
(6) Electroslag Welding (ESW) and Electrogas Welding (EGW)
(a) A change in filler metal or consumable guide metal composition.
(b) A change in consumable guide metal core cross-sectional area exceeding 30 percent.
(c) A change in flux system (cored, magnetic electrode, external flux, etc.).
(d) A change in flux composition including consumable guide coating.
(e) A change in shielding gas composition of any one constituent of more than 5 percent
of the total flow.
(f) A change in welding current exceeding ±20 percent.
(g) A change in groove design, other than square groove, increasing groove
cross-sectional area.
(h) A change in joint thickness (t) outside the limits of 0.5T to 1.1T where T is the
thickness used for the procedure qualification.
(i) A change in number of electrodes.
(j) A change to a combination with any other welding process or method.
(k) A change in postweld heat treatment.
7.6.3 The following changes in a qualified electroslag or electrogas procedure shall require
requalification of the procedure by radiographic or ultrasonic testing in conformance to the
requirements of 8.2 or 8.3.
(1) A change in filler metal diameter exceeding 1/32 in. [1 mm].
(2) A change in filler metal oscillation traverse speed exceeding 10 in/min [4 mm/s].
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 80 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
(3) A change in filler metal oscillation traverse dwell time exceeding two seconds, except as
necessary to compensate for variation in joint opening.
(4) A change in filler metal oscillation traverse length affecting proximity of filler metal to the
molding shoes by more than 1/8 in. [3 mm].
(5) A change in flux burden exceeding 30 percent.
(6) A change in shielding gas flow rate exceeding 25 percent.
(7) A change in design of molding shoes, either fixed or movable, as follows: non-fusing air
cooled solid to water cooled or vice versa, metallic to nonmetallic or vice versa, non-fusing to
fusing or vice versa, or a reduction in any cross-sectional dimension or area of solid non-fusing
shoe exceeding 25 percent.
(8) A change of welding position from vertical by more than 10 degrees.
(9) A change from alternating current to direct current, or vice versa, or a change in polarity
for direct current.
(10) A change in welding power source volt-ampere characteristics from constant voltage to
constant current, or vice versa.
(11) An increase or decrease change of voltage exceeding 10 percent.
(12) A change in square groove root opening exceeding 1/4 in. [6 mm].
(13) A change in groove design other than square groove, reducing groove cross-sectional
area.
(14) An increase or decrease in speed of vertical travel, if not an automatic function of arc
length or deposition rate, exceeding 20 percent except as necessary to compensate for variation in
joint opening.
7.7 Types of Tests and Purposes. The types of tests outlined below are to determine the
mechanical properties and soundness of welded joints made under a given procedure specification.
The tests used are as follows:
(1) Tests for Groove Welds
(a) Reduced section tension test (for tensile strength)
(b) Root bend test (for soundness)
(c) Face bend test (for soundness)
(d) Side bend test (for soundness)
(e) All-weld-metal test (for mechanical properties - electroslag or electrogas)
(2) Test for Fillet and Partial Penetration Groove Welds
(a) Macroetch test (for soundness)
7.8 Base Metal and Its Preparation. The base metal and its preparation for welding shall
comply with the welding procedure specification. For all types of welded joints, the length of the
weld and the dimensions of the base metal shall be such as to provide sufficient material for the
required test specimens.
7.9 Position of Test Welds. All welds that will be encountered in actual construction shall be
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 81 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
classified as being (1) flat, (2) horizontal, (3) vertical, or (4) overhead, in accordance with the
definitions of welding positions illustrated in Figures 15 and 16. Each procedure shall be tested in
the manner illustrated below for each position for which it is to be qualified. Welding position
limitations for procedure qualifications are shown in Table 12.
General Notes:
Figure 15 — Positions of Groove Welds
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 82 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Figure 16 — Positions of Fillet Welds
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 83 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Table 12
Procedure Qualification – Type and Position Limitations
(1)
Type of Weld and Welding Position Qualified
Qualification Test
Plate Pipe
Plate or Pipe Test
(2)
Test Weld Positions Groove Fillet Groove Fillet
(3)
Plate-Groove 1G F F F F(3)
(3) (3)
2G H F, H F, H F, H
Complete Joint 3G V V
Penetration 4G OH OH
(3)
Plate-Groove 1G F F F(3) F(3)
(3) (3) (3)
2G H F, H F, H F, H
Partial Joint Penetration 3G V
4G OH
(3)
Plate Fillet 1F F F
(3)
2F F, H F, H
(3)
3F V V
(3)
4F OH OH
Pipe-Groove 1G Rotated F F F F
2G F, H F, H F, H F, H
Complete Joint 5G F, V, OH F, V, OH F, V, OH F, V, OH
(4) (4) (4)
Penetration 6G F, H, V, OH F, H, V, OH F, H, V, OH F, H, V, OH
(5) (6)
6GR Only All All All All
1
Pipe-Fillet 1F Rotated F F
2F F,H F,H
(7)
2F Rolled F,H F,H
4F F,H,OH F,H,OH
5F All All
Notes:
(1) Positions of welding: F= flat, H = horizontal, V = vertical, OH = overhead.
(2) See Figures 17, 18, 19, and 20.
(3) Qualifies for welding pipe or tubing over 24 in. [600 mm] in diameter.
(4) Qualifies for complete joint penetration groove welds in all positions except T-, Y-, and K-connections.
(5) Limited to prequalified joint details. See 5.23.1 and Figure 12.
(6) Qualifies for T-, Y-, K-connections and any prequalified joint detail, see 5.23.1 and Figure 12.
(7) Qualifies for horizontal fillet welds on rolled pipes only.
7.9.1 Groove Plate Test Welds (see Figure 17). When making the tests to qualify groove
welds, test plates shall be welded in the following positions:
7.9.1.1 Position 1G (Flat). The test plates shall be placed in an approximately horizontal
plane and the weld metal deposited from the upper side as illustrated in Figure 17A.
7.9.1.2 Position 2G (Horizontal). The test plates shall be placed in an approximately

vertical plane with the groove approximately horizontal as illustrated in Figure 17B.
7.9.1.3 Position 3G (Vertical). The test plates shall be placed in an approximately

vertical plane with the groove approximately vertical as illustrated in Figure 17C.
7.9.1.4 Position 4G (Overhead). The test plates shall be placed in an approximately

horizontal plane and the weld metal deposited from the underside as illustrated in Figure 17D.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 84 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Figure 17 — Positions of Test Plates for Groove Welds
7.9.2 Groove Pipe Test Welds (see Figure 18). When making the tests to qualify groove
welds, test pipe shall be welded in the following positions:
7.9.2.1 Position 1G (Pipe Horizontal Rolled). The test pipe shall be placed with its axis
horizontal and the groove approximately vertical as illustrated in Figure 18A. The pipe shall be
rotated during welding so the weld metal is deposited from the upper side.
7.9.2.2 Position 2G (Pipe Vertical Fixed). The test pipe shall be placed with its axis
vertical and the welding groove approximately horizontal as illustrated in Figure 18B. The pipe
shall not be rotated during welding.
7.9.2.3 Position 5G (Pipe Horizontal Fixed). The test pipe shall be placed with its axis
horizontal and the groove approximately vertical as illustrated in Figure 18C. The pipe shall not
be rotated during welding.
7.9.2.4 Position 6G (Pipe Inclined Fixed). The test pipe shall be inclined at 45 degrees
with the horizontal as illustrated in Figure 18D. The pipe shall not be rotated during welding.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 85 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Figure 18 — Positions of Test Pipe or Tubing for Groove Welds
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 86 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
7.9.2.5 Position 6GR. Test for complete joint penetration groove welds of tubular T-, Y-
and K-connections. The test pipe shall be inclined at 45 degrees with the horizontal as illustrated
in Figure 18E. The pipe or tube shall not be rotated during welding.
7.9.3 Fillet Welds (see Figure 19). In making the tests to qualify fillet welds, test plates shall
be welded in the positions outlined below:
Figure 19 — Positions of Test Plates for Fillet Welds
7.9.3.1 Position 1F (Flat). The test plates shall be placed so that each fillet weld is
deposited with its axis approximately horizontal and its throat approximately vertical as illustrated
in Figure 19A.
7.9.3.2 Position 2F (Horizontal). The test plates shall be placed so that each fillet weld is
deposited on the upper side of the horizontal surface and against the vertical surface as illustrated
in Figure 19B.
7.9.3.3 Position 3F (Vertical). The test plates shall be placed in an approximately

vertical plane and each fillet weld deposited on the vertical surface as illustrated in Figure 19C.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 87 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
7.9.3.4 Position 4F (Overhead). The test plates shall be placed so that each fillet weld is
deposited on the underside of the horizontal surface and against the vertical surface as illustrated
in Figure 19D.
7.9.4 Fillet Welds - Pipe Positions See Figure 20.
Figure 20 — Positions of Test Pipe for Fillet Welds
7.9.4.1 Flat Position 1F. The test pipe shall be placed with its axis inclined at 45° to the
horizontal and rotated during welding as illustrated in Figure 20A. The weld metal is deposited
from above so that at the point of deposition, the axis of the weld is horizontal and the throat
vertical.
7.9.4.2 Horizontal Position 2F and 2F Rotated.
(1) The position 2F test pipe shall be placed with its axis vertical so that the weld is
deposited on upper side of the horizontal surface and against the vertical surface. The axis of the
weld will be horizontal and the pipe is not rotated during welding as illustrated in Figure 20B.
(2) The position 2F rotated test pipe shall be placed with its axis horizontal and the axis of
the deposited weld in the vertical plane as illustrated in Figure 20C. The pipe is rotated during
welding.
7.9.4.3 Overhead Position 4F. The test pipe shall be placed with its axis vertical so that
the weld is deposited on the underside of the horizontal surface and against the vertical surface.
The axis of the weld will be horizontal, and the pipe is not rotated during welding as illustrated in
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 88 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Figure 20D.
7.9.4.4 Multiple Position 5F. The test pipe shall be placed with its axis horizontal and
the axis of the deposited weld in the vertical plane as illustrated in Figure 20E. The pipe is not
rotated during welding.
7.10 Production of Test Samples. The welding procedure specification used to produce test
samples shall comply in all respects with the welding procedure specification that will be used in
production.
7.11 Test Specimens – Number, Type, and Preparation
7.11.1 Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds
7.11.1.1 The type and number of specimens that must be tested to qualify a welding
procedure are shown in Table 13 together with the range of thickness that is qualified for use in
production. The range is based on the thickness of the test plate, pipe, or tubing used in making
the qualification. In addition to these tests, the test plate for GMAW, FCAW, ESW, and EGW
shall be radiographically or ultrasonically tested (see section 6.)
7.11.1.2 Qualification of groove welds for T- or corner joints shall be butt joints having
the same groove configuration as the T- or corner joint to be used in production.
7.11.1.3 The test specimens shall be cut from the test plates, pipe, or tubing as shown in
Figures 21 through 25, whichever is applicable, and shall be prepared for testing in accordance
with Figures A5 through A8, A11, A12, A14, and A15 in AWS B4.0/4.0M, Standard Methods
for Mechanical Testing of Welds, as applicable.
Figure 21 — Procedure Qualification – Location of Test Specimens for 2 in. [50 mm] or 3
in. [75 mm] Diameter Pipe
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 89 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Figure 22 — Procedure Qualification – Location of Test Specimens for 6 in. [150 mm] or 8
in. [200 mm] Diameter Pipe
24 in. [600 mm] MINIMUM
EXTENSIONS NEED NOT BE

USED IF THE JOINT IS OF
SUFFICIENT LENGTH TO
PROVIDE 19 in. [485 mm]
OF SOUND WELD
EXCLUSIVE OF RETESTS
12 in. [300 12 in. [300

mm] mm]
Figure 23 — Procedure Qualification – Location of Test Specimens for Electroslag and

Electrogas Welded Plate
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 90 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Figure 24 — Procedure Qualification – Location of Test Specimens for Welded Test Plate
Over 3/8 in. [10 mm] Thick
Figure 25 — Procedure Qualification – Location of Test Specimens for Welded Test Plate
3/8 in. [10 mm] Thick
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 91 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Table 13
Procedure Qualification – Number and Type of Test Specimens Required and Range of Thickness
Qualified for Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds
1. Tests on plate
Plate Number of Test Specimens Required (see 7.11.1.3) Plate
Thickness (T) Sample Thickness
Tested, Welds Reduced- Qualified, T in.[mm],
in. [mm] per Position NDT(1) Section Tensile Root Bend Face Bend Side Bend Maximum(2)
1/8< T < 3/8
[3 ≤ T < 10] 1 Yes 2 2 2 — 1/8 [3] to 2T
3/8 [10] 1 Yes 2 2 2 — 3/4 [19]
3/8< T < 1 1 Yes 2 — — 4 2T
[3 < T < 25}
1 [25] and over 1 Yes 2 — — 4 Unlimited
2. Tests on pipe or tubing
Pipe Size – Sample Weld Test Specimens Required (see 7.11.1.3) Pipe or Tube Size Qualified
Number of Wall Thickness, in. [mm]
Wall NDT Other
Thickness, Sample Inspections Reduced-
Diameter T Welds per (See Notes Section Root Face Side Diameter,
in. [mm] in. mm] Position 3 and 4) Tensile Bend Bend Bend in. [mm] Min. Max.
2 [50] 0.218 [5.5]
Sch. 80 3/4 [19]
or 2 Yes 2 2 2 — through 0.125 [3] 0.674 [17]
3 [75] 0.216 [5.5] 4 [100]
Sch. 40
6 in. [150] 0.562 [14]
Sch. 120 4 [100]
or 1 Yes 2 — — 4 and 0.187 [5] Any
8 in. [200] 0.500 [13] over
Sch. 80
Job Size Pipe or Tubing
Nominal Wall
Pipe Diam. Thickness,
in. [mm] in. [mm]
1/8 ≤ T ≤ 3/8 ≥ Test
1 Yes 2 2 2 — 0.125 [3] 2T
[3 ≤ T ≤ 10] Diam.
3/8 < T < 3/4 ≥ Test
< 24 [600] 1 Yes 2 — — 4 T/2 2T
[10 < T < 19] Diam.
≥ Test
T ≥ 3/4 [19] 1 Yes 2 — — 4 0.375 [10] Any
Diam.
1/8 ≤ T ≤ 3/8 ≥ Test
1 Yes 2 2 2 — 0.125 [3] 2T
[3 ≤ T ≤ 10] Diam.
≥ 24 [600] 3/8 < T < 3/4
1 Yes 2 — — 4 ≥ 24 [600] T/2 2T
[10 < T < 19]
T ≥ 3/4 [19] 1 Yes 2 — — 4 ≥ 24 [600] 0.375 [10] Any
3. Tests on Electroslag and Electrogas Welding
Test Specimens Required (see 7.11.1.3) Plate
Plate Thickness Number of Reduced- All-Weld-Metal Thickness
Tested Sample Welds NDT(1, 5) Section Tensile Tensile Side Bend Impact Test(6) Qualified
T(7) 1 Yes 2 1 4 8 0.5 T- 1.1 T
Notes:
(1) All welded test plates shall be visually inspected.
(2) For square groove welds, the maximum thickness qualified shall be limited to thickness tested.
(3) All welded test pipes or tubing shall be visually inspected.
(4) For pipe or tubing, the full circumference of the completed weld shall be tested by RT or UT prior to mechanical testing.
(5) 6 in. [150 mm] minimum length of weld shall be test by radiographic or ultrasonic methods prior to mechanical testing.
(6) If specified.
(7) T is the test plate thickness.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 92 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
7.11.2 Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds. A sample of the type of groove design
using the same joint to be used in production, except that the depth of groove need not exceed 1
in. [25 mm], shall be made and three macroetched cross-sections prepared to demonstrate that the
designated effective throat thickness is obtained and that the requirements of the procedure
specification are met.
7.11.3 Fillet Welds. The type and number of specimens that must be tested to qualify a
welding procedure are shown in Table 14. Test specimens shall be prepared by cutting the test
plate, pipe or tubing as shown in Figures 26 through 28, as applicable.
Table 14
Procedure Qualification – Number and Type of Test Specimens Required and Range of
Thickness Qualified for Fillet Welds
Test Specimens Required Sizes Qualified
All-Weld-
Metal
Number of Macro-Etch Tension Side-Bend
Test Welds Per (see 7.28.3) (see (see Plate/Pipe
(1)
Specimen Fillet Size Procedure (see 7.29.3) 7.11.1.3) 7.11.1.3) Thickness Fillet Size
Single-pass, 1 in each 3 faces - - Unlimited Max. tested
max. size to be position to single-pass
used in be used
Plate
construction
T-test
(see Fig. 26) Multiple-pass, 1 in each 3 faces - - Unlimited Min. tested
min. size to be position to multiple-pass
used in be used and larger
construction
Single-pass, 1 in each 3 faces - - Unlimited Max. tested
max. size to be position to (except for single-pass and
used in be used 4F & 5F, smaller
construction (see Table 4 faces
Pipe 14) required)
(2)
T-Test
Multiple-pass, 1 in each 3 faces - - Unlimited Min. tested
(see Fig. 27)
min. size to be position to (except for multiple-pass
used in be used (see 4F & 5F, and larger
construction Table 14) 4 faces
required)
Notes
(1) All welded test plates shall be visually inspected.
(2) See Table 12 for pipe diameter qualification.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 93 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Weld Sizes
Size T1 min* T2 min*
in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm]
3/16 [5] 1/2 [13] 3/16 [5]
4 in. [100 mm] 1/4 [6] 3/4 [19] 1/4 [6]
MINIMUM 5/16 [8] 1 [25] 5/16 [8]
3/8 [10] 1 [25] 3/8 [10]
1/2 [13] 1 [25] 1/2 [13]
5/8 [16] 1 [25] 5/8 [16]
3/4 [19] 1 [25] 3/4 [19]
>3/4 [19] 1 [25] 1 [25]
* Note: Where the maximum plate thickness
used in production is less than the value shown
in the table, the maximum thickness of the
production pieces may be substituted for T1 and
6 in. [150 T2.
mm]
MINIMUM
12 in. [300 mm]

MINIMUM
6 in. [150
mm]
MINIMUM
Figure 26 — Procedure Qualification – Fillet Weld Soundness Test (Plate to Plate)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 94 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
3 in. 1 in. [25 mm]

[75 mm]
3 in.
[75 mm]
Figure 27 — Procedure Qualification – Fillet Weld Soundness Test (Pipe to Pipe)
3 in.
[75 mm]
2 in.
[50 mm]
General Note: Pipe shall be of sufficient thickness to prevent melt-through.
Figure 28 — Procedure Qualification – Fillet Weld Soundness Test (Pipe to Plate)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 95 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
7.12.1 Reduced Section Tension Specimens. Before testing, the least width and
corresponding thickness of the reduced section shall be measured in inches [millimeters]. The
cross-sectional area shall be obtained as follows:
Cross-sectional area = width x thickness.
The specimen shall be ruptured under tensile load and the maximum load in pounds [Newtons]
shall be determined. The tensile strength in pounds per square inch [Pascals] shall be obtained by
dividing the maximum load by the cross-sectional area.
7.12.2 Macroetch Test. Etching shall be made with a suitable solution to give a clear
definition of the weld.
7.12.3 Root-, Face-, and Side-Bend Specimens. Each specimen shall be bent in a jig having
the contour shown in Figures A1 through A3 from AWS B4.0/B4.0M, Standard Methods for
Mechanical Testing of Welds in accordance with those illustrations. Any convenient means may
be used to move the plunger member with relation to the die member.
The specimen shall be placed on the die member of the jig with the weld at midspan. Face-
bend specimens shall be placed with the face of the weld oriented toward the gap. Root-bend and
fillet weld soundness specimens shall be placed with the root of the weld oriented toward the gap.
Side-bend specimens shall be placed with the side showing the greater defects, if any, oriented
toward the gap. The plunger shall force the specimen into the die until the specimen becomes U-
shaped. The weld and heat-affected zones shall be centered and shall be completely within the
bent portion of the specimen after testing.
When using the wraparound jig, the specimen shall be clamped on one end so that the
specimen does not slide during the bending operation. The weld and heat-affected zones shall be
completely within the bent portion of the specimen after testing. Test specimens shall be removed
from the jig when the outer roll has been moved 180 degrees from the starting point.
7.12.4 All-Weld-Metal Tension Test. The test specimen shall be tested in conformance to
ASTM A370, Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products.
7.12.5 The radiographic procedure and technique shall be in conformance to the requirements
of 8.2.
7.13 Test Results Required. The requirements for the test results shall be as follows:
7.13.1 Reduced Section Tension Test. The tensile strength shall be not less than the
minimum of the specified tensile range of the base metal used.
7.13.2 Root, Face and Side Bend Tests. The convex surface of the bend test specimen shall
be visually examined for surface discontinuities. For acceptance, the surface shall contain no
discontinuities exceeding the following dimensions:
(1) 1/8 in. [3 mm] measured in any direction on the surface.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 96 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
(2) 3/8 in. [10 mm] - the sum of the greatest dimensions of all discontinuities exceeding 1/32
in. [1 mm], but less than or equal to 1/8 in. [3 mm].
(3) 1/4 in. [6 mm] - the maximum corner crack, except when that corner crack resulted from
visible slag inclusion or other fusion type discontinuities, then the 1/8 in. [3 mm] maximum shall
apply.
Specimens with corner cracks exceeding 1/4 in. [6 mm] with no evidence of slag inclusions or
other fusion type discontinuities shall be disregarded and a replacement test specimen from the
original weldment shall be tested.
7.13.3 Macroetch Tests. The specimens shall be examined for defects and any which have
defects prohibited in 8.5.6 shall be considered as failed. The specimens shall have the designated
effective throat for partial joint penetration groove welds. Fillet weld specimens shall show fusion
to the root, but not necessarily beyond, and both legs shall be equal to within 1/8 in. [3 mm].
Convexity and concavity shall not exceed the limits specified in Figure 45.
7.13.4 All-Weld-Metal Tensiles (Electroslag and Electrogas). The mechanical properties

shall not be less than those specified in the filler metal requirements.
7.13.5 Nondestructive Testing.
7.13.5.1 For acceptable qualification, the weld, as revealed by the radiograph or ultrasonic
testing, shall conform to the requirements of 8.2 and 8.3, whichever are applicable.
7.13.5.2 For acceptable qualification, the pipe weld, when inspected visually, shall
conform to the following requirements:
(1) The weld shall be free of cracks.
(2) All craters shall be filled to the full cross-section of the weld.
(3) The face of the weld shall be at least flush with the outside surface of the pipe and the
weld shall merge smoothly with the base metal. Undercut shall not exceed 1/32 in. [1 mm]. Weld
reinforcement shall not exceed the following:
Pipe Wall Thickness Reinforcement, Max
3/8 [10 mm] and less 3/32 [2.4 mm]
Over 3/8 [10 mm] to 3/4 [20 mm] incl. 1/8 [3 mm]
Over 3/4 [20 mm] 3/16 [5 mm]
(4) The root of the weld shall be inspected and there shall be no evidence of cracks,
incomplete fusion or incomplete joint penetration. A concave root surface is permitted within the
limits in 7.13.5.2 (5), provided the total weld thickness is equal to or greater than that of the base
metal.
(5) The maximum root surface concavity shall be 1/16 in. [2 mm] and the maximum melt-
through shall be 1/8 in. [3 mm].
7.14 Records. Records of the test results shall be kept by the Manufacturer or contractor and
shall be available to those authorized to examine them.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 97 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
7.15 Retests. If any one test specimen fails to meet the test requirements when all the other test
specimens meet the test requirements, two retests for that particular type of test specimen may be
performed with specimens cut from the same procedure qualification test material. The results of
both retest specimens must meet the test requirements. For material over 1 1/2 in. [38 mm] in
thickness, failure of a specimen shall require testing of all specimens of the same type from two
additional locations in the test material.
Part C – Welder Qualification
7.16 General. The qualification tests described herein are specially devised tests to determine the
welder's ability to produce sound welds. It is not intended that the qualification tests shall be used
as a guide for welding during actual production. The latter shall be performed in conformance to
the requirements of the welding procedure specification.
7.17 Qualification Tests Required
7.17.1 The qualification tests for welders performing manual and semiautomatic operations
shall be as follows:
(1) Groove weld qualification test for plate of unlimited thickness (see Figures 29 and 30).
(2) Groove weld qualification test for plate of limited thickness (see Figures 31 and 32).
(3) Fillet weld qualification test for fillet welds only - Option 1 (see Figure 37) or Option 2
(see Figure 38) - Contractor's option.
1 in.
[25 mm]
1 in.
[25 mm]
6 in. [150 mm] 5 in. [125 mm]

Minimum 1/4 in.
Minimum
[6 mm]
General Notes:
1. When radiography is used for testing, no tack welds shall be in the test area.
2. The backing thickness shall be 1/4 in. [6 mm] to 3/8 in. [10 mm] maximum. Backing width shall be 3 in. [75 mm] when not removed
for radiography, otherwise it shall be 1 in. [25 mm].
Figure 29 — Welder Qualification – Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 98 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
5 in. [125 mm]

Minimum
6 in. [150 mm]

Minimum
1/4 in.
[6 mm]
1 in.
[25 mm]
1 in.
[25 mm]
General Notes:
Figure 30 — Welder Qualification – Optional Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness –

Horizontal Position
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 99 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
1 in.
[25 mm]
3/8 in.
[10 mm]
6 in. [150 mm] 1/4 in. 7 in. [175 mm]

Minimum [6 mm] Minimum
General Notes:
Figure 31 — Welder Qualification – Test Plate for Limited Thickness – Flat Position
7 in. [175 mm]

Minimum
6 in. [150 mm]

Minimum
1/4 in.
[6 mm]
1 in.
3/8 in.
[25 mm]
[10 mm]
General Notes:
Figure 32 — Welder Qualification – Optional Test Plate for Limited Thickness –

Horizontal Position
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 100 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
7.17.2 The pipe or tubing qualification tests for welders performing manual and semiautomatic
operations shall be as follows:
(1) Groove-weld qualification test for butt joints on pipe or square or rectangular tubing (see
Figures 33 and 34).
1/8 in. [3 mm] 1/8 in. [3 mm]

Maximum Maximum
Figure 33 — Welder Qualification – Plate Figure 34 — Welder Qualification – Pipe

and Pipe Butt Joint Without Backing Butt Joint With Backing
(2) Groove weld qualification test for T-, Y-, or K-connections on pipe or square or
rectangular tubing (see Figure 35).
(3) Groove weld qualification test for butt joints on square or rectangular tubing tested on flat
plate (see Figure 36).
6 in. [150 mm]

Minimum
6 in. [150 mm]

Minimum
1/16 in. [2 mm] 6 in. [150 mm] Minimum

1/2 in. [13 mm]
Minimum
1/2 in. [13 mm]

1/8 in. Maximum
[3 mm]
3/16 in. [5 mm] Minimum
Figure 35 — Welder Qualification – Test Joint for T-, Y-, and K-Connections on Pipe or
Square or Rectangular Tubing
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 101 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
3 in. [75 mm] Minimum
3/8 in. [10 mm] Minimum
1/2 in. [13 mm]

1/16 in. [2 mm]
1/8 in. [3 mm]
Figure 36 — Welder Qualification – Optional Test Joint for T-, Y-, and K-Connections on
7.17.3 The welder making a complete joint penetration plate groove weld procedure
qualification test meeting the requirements is thereby qualified for that process and test position
for plates and square or rectangular tubing of thicknesses equal to or less than the thickness of the
test plate welded, unless it is 1 in. [25 mm] or more in thickness, in which case the welder will be
qualified for all thicknesses.
7.17.4 The welder making a complete joint penetration groove weld pipe procedure
qualification test without backing strip meeting the requirements is thereby qualified for that
process and test position for piping having a wall thickness equal to or less than the wall thickness
of the test pipe welded, unless it is 3/4 in. [19 mm] or more in thickness, in which case the welder
will be qualified for all thicknesses.
7.18 Limitation of Variables. For the qualification of a welder, the following rules shall apply:
7.18.1 A welder shall be qualified for each group of base metals shown in AWS B2.1,
Standard for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification, that is to be used and for each
process to be used.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 102 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
7.18.2 A welder qualified for manual shielded metal arc welding of carbon and low-alloy steel
with an electrode identified in the table below shall be considered qualified to weld or tack weld
with any other electrode in the same group designation and with any electrode listed in a
numerically lesser group designation:
Group Designation AWS Electrode Classification*
F4 EXX15, EXX16, EXX18
F3 EXX10, EXX11
F1 EXX20, EXX24, EXX27, EXX28
*The letters "XX" used in the classification designation above indicates the various strength levels
of electrodes.
7.18.3 A welder qualified with an approved electrode and shielding medium combination shall
be considered qualified to weld or tack weld with any other approved electrode and shielding
medium combination for the process used in the qualification test.
7.18.4 A change in the position of welding, other than those changes previously qualified,
shall require requalification.
7.18.5 A change from one diameter wall pipe grouping to another, shown in Table 16, shall
require requalification.
7.18.6 When the pipe or tubing is in the 5G or 6G position, a change in the direction of
welding, from bottom to top or top to bottom, shall require requalification.
7.19 Groove Weld Plate Qualification Test for Plate of Unlimited Thickness. Joint detail as
follows: 1 in. [25 mm], single-V-groove, 45 degree included angle, 1/4 in. [6 mm] root opening
with backing (see Figure 29). For horizontal position qualification, the joint detail may be
(contractor's option) as follows: single-bevel-groove, 45 degree groove angle, 1/4 in. [6 mm] root
opening with backing (see Figure 30). Backing must be at least 3/8 in. [10 mm] thick x 3 in. [75
mm] wide x length of weld if radiography is used for testing without removal of backing. It must
be at least 3/8 in. [10 mm] thick x 1 in. [25 mm] wide x length of weld for mechanical testing after
the backing is removed. Minimum length of welding groove shall be 5 in. [125 mm].
7.20 Groove Weld Plate Qualification Test for Plate of Limited Thickness. Joint detail as
follows: 3/8 in. [10 mm] plate, single-V-groove, 45 degree included angle, 1/4 in. [6 mm] root
opening with backing (see Figure 31). For horizontal position qualification, the joint detail may
be (contractor's option) as follows: single-bevel-groove, 45 degree groove angle, 1/4 in. [6 mm]
root opening with backing (see Figure 32). Backing must be at least 3/8 in. [10 mm] thick x 3 in.
[75 mm] wide x length of weld if radiography is used for testing without removal of backing. It
must be at least 3/8 in. [10 mm] thick x 1 in. [25 mm] wide x length of weld for mechanical
testing or, if radiography is used, for testing after the backing is removed. Minimum length of
welding groove shall be 5 in. [125 mm].
7.21 Groove Weld Qualification Test for Butt Joints on Pipe or Square or Rectangular
Tubing. The joint detail shall be in conformance to a qualified welding procedure specification
for a single-welded pipe butt weld or shall be as follows: pipe diameter and wall thickness as
required, single-V-groove, 60 degree included angle, 1/8 in. [3 mm] maximum root face and 1/8
in. [3 mm] root opening without backing strip (see Figure 33), or single-V-groove, 60 degree
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 103 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
included angle and suitable root opening with backing (see Figure 34).
7.22 Groove Weld Qualification Test for T-, Y-, or K-Connections on Pipe or Square or
Rectangular Tubing. The joint detail shall be as follows: single bevel, 37½ degree included
angle with bevel on pipe or tube at least 1/2 in. [13 mm] in thickness; the square edge pipe or tube
shall be at least 3/16 in. [5 mm] thicker than the beveled pipe thickness; 1/16 in. [2 mm] maximum
root face and 1/8 in. [3 mm] root opening. A restriction ring shall be placed on the thicker
material within 1/2 in. [13 mm] of the joint and shall extend at least 6 in. [150 mm] beyond the
surface of the pipe or tube (see Figures 35 and 36).
7.23 Fillet Weld Qualification Test
7.23.1 Option 1 - Test Plate. The T-test shall be in conformance to Figure 37.
7.23.2 Option 2 - Test Plate. The soundness test shall be in conformance to Figure 38.
1 in. [25 mm]
6 in. [150 mm]
1/2 in. [13 mm
5/16 in. [8 mm] FILLET WELD
4 in. [100 mm]
1/2 in. [13 mm]
8 in.
4 in. [100 mm] [200 mm]
General Notes:
1. Plate thickness and dimensions are minimums.
2. Either end of the test weldment may be used for the required macroetch specimen. The other end may be discarded.
Figure 37 – Welder Qualification – Fillet Weld Break and Macroectch Test Plate - Option 1
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 104 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
1 in. [25 mm]
7 in. [175 mm]

MINIMUM
1 in. [25 mm]
1 1/2 in.
1 1/2 in.
[38 mm]
[38 mm]
15/16 in. [24 mm]
3 in. [75 mm] 3 in. [75 mm]

MINIMUM MINIMUM
RADIUS 1/8 in. [3 mm]
MAXIMUM
3/8 in. [10 mm]
AT LEAST 3/8 in. [10 mm] X 2 in. [50 mm].

IF RADIOGRAPHY IS USED THEN USE AT
[10 mm] LEAST A 3/8 in. [10 mm] X 3 in. [75 mm]
BACKING.
THE WELD REINFORCEMENT AND THE BACKING SHALL BE

REMOVED FLUSH WITH THE PLATE. THERMAL CUTTING MAY BE
USED FOR THE REMOVAL OF THE MAJORITY OF THE MATERIAL,
PROVIDED AT LEAST 1/8 in. [3 mm] OF ITS THICKNESS IS LEFT
FOR REMOVAL BY MACHINING OR GRINDING.
Figure 38 — Welder Qualification – Fillet Weld Root-Bend Test Plate – Option 2
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 105 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
7.24 Positions of Test Welds. See Table 15.
Table 15
(1)
Welder and Welding Operator Qualification – Type and Position Limitations
Weld Type and Welding Position Qualified

Qualification Test
Plate Pipe
Type of Test Plate or Pipe
(2)
Weld Test Position Groove Fillet Groove Fillet
1G F F, H F, H
2G F, H F, H F, H
(3)
Plate-groove 3G F, H, V F, H, V F F, H
(3)
4G F, OH F, H, OH F, H F
(3)
3G & 4G All All F, H, V F, H
1F F F
2F F, H F, H
Plate-fillet(4) 3F F, H, V
4F F, H, OH
3F & 4F All
1G Rotated F F, H F F, H
2G F, H F, H F, H F, H
5G F, V, OH F, H, OH F, V, OH F, V, OH
6G See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4
Pipe-groove
2G & 5G See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4
6G (Fig. 18D) All All All All
6GR (Fig. 18E) All T-, Y-, K-Box All
Only
1F Rotated F F
2F F, H F, H
Pipe-fillet 2F Rotated F, H F, H
4F F, H, OH F, H, OH
5F All All
Notes:
(1) Positions of welding: F= flat, H = horizontal, V = vertical, OH = overhead.
(2) See Figures 17, 18, 19, and 20.
(3) Welder qualified to weld tubulars over 24 in. [600 mm] in diameter with backing or back gouging, for the test positions
indicated.
(4) Qualified for all but groove welds for T-, Y-, and K-connections.
7.24.1 Groove Plate Test Welds
7.24.1.1 Qualification in the 1G (flat) position qualifies for flat position groove welding of
plate, pipe, and tubing, flat and horizontal position fillet welding of plate, and flat position fillet
welding of pipe and tubing.
7.24.1.2 Qualification in the 2G (horizontal) position qualifies for flat and horizontal
position groove and flat and horizontal position fillet welding of plate, pipe, and tubing.
7.24.1.3 Qualification in the 3G (vertical) position qualifies for flat, horizontal, and
vertical position groove and flat, horizontal and vertical position fillet welding of plate.
7.24.1.4 Qualification in the 4G (overhead) position qualifies for flat and overhead
position groove and flat, horizontal, and overhead position fillet welding of plate.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 106 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
7.24.2 Groove Weld Test for Pipe
7.24.2.1 Qualification in the 1G (pipe horizontal rolled) position qualifies for flat position
groove welding of pipe, tubing, and plate, flat position fillet welding of pipe and tubing, and flat
and horizontal position fillet welding of plate.
7.24.2.2 Qualification in the 2G (pipe vertical) position qualifies for flat and horizontal
position groove and flat and horizontal position fillet welding of pipe, tubing, and plate.
7.24.2.3 Qualification in the 5G (pipe horizontal fixed) position qualifies for flat, vertical,
and overhead position fillet welding of pipe, tubing, and plate.
7.24.2.4 Qualification in the 6G (inclined fixed) position qualifies for all position groove
and all position fillet welding of pipe, tubing, and plate.
7.24.2.5 Qualification for T-, Y-, or K-connections in the 6G (inclined fixed) position
qualifies for groove welding T-, Y-, and K-connections, and groove and fillet welding in all
positions of pipe, tubing, and plate.
7.24.3 Fillet Weld Test - Welder Qualification
7.24.3.1 Qualification in the 1F (flat) position qualifies for flat position fillet welding of
plate, pipe, and tubing.
7.24.3.2 Qualification in the 2F (horizontal) position qualifies for flat and horizontal
position fillet welding of plate, pipe and tubing.
7.24.3.3 Qualification in the 3F (vertical) position qualifies for flat, horizontal, and vertical
position fillet welding of plate.
7.24.3.4 Qualification in the 4F (overhead) position qualifies for flat, horizontal, and
overhead position fillet welding of plate.
7.24.4 Qualification for groove plate tests in 1G (flat) or 2G (horizontal) position also shall
qualify for butt welding pipe with a backing in the same position qualified. If no backing is used
for the groove plate test, this also shall qualify for groove welding pipe with or without backing in
the same position qualified.
7.25 Base Metal. The base metal used shall comply with the welding procedure specification.
7.26 Welding Procedure. The welder shall follow the welding procedure specification.
7.27 Test Specimens – Number, Type, and Preparation
7.27.1 The type and number of test specimens that must be tested to qualify a welder by
mechanical testing are shown in Table 16, together with a range of thickness that is qualified for
use in construction by the thickness of the test plate, pipe, or tubing used in making the
qualification. Radiographic testing of the test weld, except for fillet welds, may be used at the
contractor's option in lieu of mechanical testing.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 107 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Table 16
Welder and Welding Operator Qualification – Number
and Type of Specimens Required and Range of Thickness Qualified
1. Test on Plate
Number of Specimens
Thickness of Plate
Test Plate (T) (1) Thickness
Bend Tests
as Welded, Visual T-Joint Macroetch Qualified,
Type of Weld in. [mm] Inspection Face Root Side Break Test in. [mm]
Groove(2) 3/8 [19] Yes 1 1 — — — 3/4 [19] max(5)
Groove 3/8 < T <1 Yes — — 2 — — 2T max(5, 6)
[10 < T < 25]
Groove ≥ 1 [25] Yes — — 2 — — Unlimited(5)
Fillet Option No. 1(3) 1/2 [13] Yes — — 1 1 Unlimited
(4)
Fillet Option No. 2 3/8 [10] Yes — 2 — — — Unlimited
Plug 3/8 [10] Yes — — — — 2 Unlimited
2. Testing on Pipe or Tubing
Plate, Pipe, or Tube
Number of Specimens Wall Thickness
Pipe or Tube
Nominal Size Qualified, in.
Type of Diameter Thickness Visual Face Root Side Face Root Side Qualified, Min. Max.
Weld in. [mm] in. [mm] Inspection Bend Bend Bend Bend Bend Bend in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm]
2 [50] @ 0.218 [5.5]
Schedule or
80 or 40 0.154 [4] 4 [100]
0.125 0.674
Groove Yes 1 1 — 2 2 — or
[3] [17]
3 [75] @ 0.300 [7.5] smaller
Schedule or
80 or 40 0.216 [5.5]
T-, Y-. and
Groove See Fig.39 Yes — — — — — — — K- — Un-
connections, limited
4 [100]
Job Size Pipe or
Tubing*
Type of Diameter Wall
Weld in. [mm] Thickness
3/4 [19]
0.125 0.674
Groove ≤ 4 [100] Any Yes 1 1 — 2 2 — through
[3] [17]
4 [100]
0.187 Un-
Groove > 4 [100] Any Yes — — 2 — — 4 1/2 test diam.
[5] limited
Notes:
(1) Radiographic examination of the welder of welding operator.
(2) Not applicable for welding operator qualification.
(3) See Figure 41.
(4) See Figure 42.
(5) Also qualifies for welding fillet welds on material of unlimited thickness.
(6) T max for welding operator qualification.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 108 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Table 16 (Continued)
2. Tests on Pipe or Tubing, continued
Nominal Visual Fillet Macroetch Pipe or Tube Wall thickness
Type of Weld Diameter @ Thickness Inspection Weld Break Test Size Qualified Qualified, in. [mm]
T-, Y, and K-
Groove See Fig. 40 Yes — 4 Unlimited(7)
box connections
2 in. [50 mm] @ Sch.
80 (0.214 in. [5.5
mm]) Any except
Fillet or Yes 1(8) 1 T-, Y-, and K- Unlimited
2 in. [50 mm] @ Sch. connections
40 (0.154 in. [4 mm])
or
Job Size Pipe
3. Tests on Electroslag and Electrogas
Test Specimens Required
Plate Thickness Tested Number of Side Bend(9) Plate Thickness

Visual Inspection
in. [mm] Sample Welds (see section 5.11.1.3) Qualified, in. [mm]
Unlimited for 1 1/2 [38]
1 1/2 [38] max 1 Yes 2 Max tested
for < 1 1/2 [38]
Notes:
(7) Also qualifies for welding fillet welds on material of unlimited thickness.
(8) The quarter-section for the joint-break test may be further sectioned to facilitate the testing and make the break possible, provided that at least on welding start
and stop are tested.
(9) Radiographic examination of the welder or welding operator test pipe may be made in lieu of the bend test.
7.27.2 Guided-bend test specimens shall be prepared by cutting the test plate, pipe, or tubing
as shown in Figures 29, 30, 31, 32, 38, or 39, whichever are applicable, to form specimens
approximately rectangular in cross-section. The test specimens shall be prepared for testing on
accordance with Figures A5 through A8, A11, A12, A14, and A15 in AWS B4.0/4.0M, Standard
Methods for Mechanical Testing of Welds, as applicable.
7.27.3 The fillet weld break and macroetch test specimens shall be cut from the test joint as
shown in Figure 37. The end of the macroetch specimen shall be smooth for etching.
7.27.4 If radiography is used in lieu of the prescribed bend tests, the weld reinforcement need
not be ground or otherwise smoothed for inspection, unless its surface irregularities or juncture
with the base metal would cause objectionable weld defects to be obscured in the radiograph. If
the backing is removed for radiography, the root shall be ground flush with the base metal.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 109 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
PIPE WALL 3/8 in. [10 mm] PIPE WALL OVER 3/8 in. [10 mm]
AND UNDER
PIPE WALL 3/8 in. [10 mm] PIPE WALL OVER 3/8 in. [10 mm]
AND UNDER
Figure 39 — Welder Qualification – Location of Test Specimens for Welded Test Pipe and
7.28.1 Root-, Face-, and Side-Bend Specimens. Each specimen shall be bent in a jig having
the contour shown in Figures A1 through A3 from AWS B4.0/B4.0M, Standard Methods for
Mechanical Testing of Welds in accordance with those illustrations. Any convenient means may
be used to move the plunger member with relation to the die member.
The specimen shall be placed on the die member of the jig with the weld at midspan. Face-
bend specimens shall be placed with the face of the weld directed toward the gap. Root-bend and
fillet weld soundness specimens shall be placed with the root of the weld oriented toward the gap.
Side bend specimens shall be placed with that side showing the greater defects, if any, oriented
toward the gap.
The plunger shall force the specimen into the die until the specimen becomes U-shaped. The
weld and heat-affected zones shall be centered and completely within the bent portion of the
specimen after testing.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 110 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
When using the wraparound jig, the specimen shall be clamped on one end so that the
specimen cannot slide during the bending operation. The weld and heat-affected zones shall be
completely within the bent portion of the specimen after testing. Test specimens shall be removed
from the jig when the outer roll has been moved 180 degrees from the starting point.
7.28.2 Fillet Weld Break Test. The entire length of the fillet weld shall be examined visually
and then the 6 in. [150 mm] long specimen shall be loaded in such a way that the root of the weld
shall be in tension. The load shall be steadily increased or repeated until the specimen fractures or
bends flat upon itself.
7.28.3 Macroetch Test. Etching shall be made by using a suitable solution to give a clear
definition of the weld.
7.28.4 Radiographic Test. The radiographic procedure and technique shall be in

conformance to the requirements of 8.2. Only the center half of the length of the test plate or 50
percent of the test pipe shall be subject to testing.
7.29 Test Results Required
7.29.1 Root-, Face-, and Side-Bend Tests. The convex surface of the bend test specimen
shall be visually examined for surface discontinuities. For acceptance, the surface shall contain no
discontinuities exceeding the following dimensions:
(1) 1/8 in. [3 mm] measured in any direction on the surface
(2) 3/8 in. [10 mm] - the sum of the greatest dimensions of all discontinuities exceeding 1/32
in. [1 mm], but less than or equal to 1/8 in. [3 mm]
(3) 1/4 in. [6 mm] - the maximum corner crack, except when that corner crack resulted from
visible slag inclusion or other fusion type discontinuities, then the 1/8 in. [3 mm] maximum shall
apply.
Specimens with corner cracks exceeding 1/4 in. [6 mm] with no evidence of slag inclusions or
other fusion-type discontinuities shall be disregarded and a replacement test specimen from the
original weldment shall be tested.
7.29.2 Fillet Weld Break Test
7.29.2.1 To pass the visual examination, the fillet weld shall present a reasonably uniform
appearance and shall be free of overlap, cracks, and excessive undercut. There shall be no
porosity visible on the surface of the weld.
7.29.2.2 The specimen shall pass the test if it bends flat upon itself. If the fillet weld
fractures, the fractured surface shall show complete penetration into the root of the joint and shall
exhibit no incomplete fusion to the base metal nor any inclusion or porosity larger than 3/32 in.
[2.4 mm] in its greatest dimension. The sum of the greatest dimensions of all inclusions and
porosity shall not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm] in the 6 in. [150 mm] long specimen.
7.29.3 Macroetch Test. The fillet weld shall show fusion at the root of the joint, but not
necessarily beyond the root. The weld metal and heat-affected zone shall be free of cracks.
Concavity or convexity of the weld face shall not exceed 1/16 in. [2 mm]. Fillet legs shall not
differ in size by more than 1/8 in. [3 mm].
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 111 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
7.29.4 Radiographic Test. For acceptable qualification, the weld, as revealed by the
radiograph, shall conform to the requirements of 8.2.4.6.
7.29.5 For acceptable qualification, the pipe weld when examined visually shall conform to the
following requirements:
7.29.5.1 The weld shall be free of cracks.
7.29.5.2 All craters shall be filled to the full cross-section of the weld.
7.29.5.3 The face of the weld shall be at least flush with the outside surface of the pipe
and the weld shall merge smoothly with the base metal. Undercut shall not exceed 1/32 in. [1
mm]. Weld reinforcement shall not exceed the following:
Pipe Wall Thickness Reinforcement, Max
3/8 [10 mm] and less 3/32 [2.4 mm]
Over 3/8[10 mm] to 3/4 [19 mm] incl. 1/8 [3 mm]
Over 3/4 [19 mm] 3/16 [5 mm]
7.29.5.4 The root of the weld shall be inspected and there shall be no evidence of cracks,
incomplete fusion, or incomplete joint penetration. A concave root surface is permitted within the
limits shown below provided the total weld thickness is equal to or greater than that of the base
metal.
7.29.5.5 The maximum root surface concavity shall be 1/16 in. [2 mm] and the maximum
melt-through shall be 1/8 in. [3 mm].
7.30 Retests. In case a welder fails to meet the requirements of one or more test welds, a retest
may be allowed under the following conditions:
7.30.1 An immediate retest may be made consisting of two test welds of each type failed; all
test specimens shall meet all the requirements specified for such welds.
7.30.2 A retest may be made provided there is evidence that the welder has had further
training or practice. In this case a complete retest shall be made.
7.31 Period of Effectiveness. The welder's qualification specified herein shall be considered in
effect indefinitely unless (1) the welder is not engaged in a given process of welding for which he
is qualified for a period exceeding six months or (2) there is a specific reason to question a
welder's ability. In case (1), the requalification test need be made only in the 3/8 in. [10 mm]
thickness.
Part D – Welding Operator Qualification
7.33 General. The qualification tests described herein are specially devised to determine the
welding operator's ability to produce sound welds. It is not intended that the qualification tests
shall be used as a guide for welding during actual construction. The latter shall be performed in
conformance to the requirements of the procedure specification.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 112 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
7.34 Limitation of Variables. For the qualification of a welding operator, the following rules
shall apply:
7.34.1 A welding operator shall be separately qualified for each group of base metals shown in
AWS B2.1 that is to be used, and for each process to be used.
7.34.2 For other than electroslag (ESW) or electrogas welding (EGW), a welding operator
qualified to weld with multiple electrodes shall be qualified to weld with a single electrode, but
not vice versa.
7.34.3 An ESW or EGW operator qualified with an approved electrode and shielding medium
combination shall be considered qualified to weld with any other approved electrode and shielding
7.34.4 A change in the position in which welding is done, as defined in 7.9, shall require
requalification.
7.35 Qualification Tests Required
7.35.1 The qualification test for a welding operator for other than electroslag or electrogas
shall have a joint detail as follows: 1 in. [25 mm] plate, single-V-groove, 20 degree included
groove angle, 5/8 in. [16 mm] root opening with backing. Backing must be at least 3/8 in. [10
mm] thick x 3 in. [75 mm] wide x length of weld if radiography is used for testing without
removal of backing. It must be at least 3/8 in. [10 mm] thick x 1 1/2 in. [40 mm] wide x length of
weld for mechanical testing or if radiography is used for testing after the backing is removed.
Minimum length of welding groove shall be 15 in. [380 mm] (see Figure 40). This test will
qualify the welding operator for groove and fillet welding in materials of unlimited thickness.
7.35.2 The qualification test for an electroslag or electrogas welding operator shall consist of
welding a joint of the maximum thickness of material to be used in construction; however, the
thickness of the material of the test weld need not exceed 1 1/2 in. [40 mm] (see Figure 41). If a
test weld is made in the 1 1/2 in. [40 mm] thickness, no test need be made for lesser thicknesses.
This test shall qualify the welding operator for groove and fillet welds in material of unlimited
thickness.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 113 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
2 in.
[50 mm]
1 in.
[25 mm]
6 in. [150 mm
MINIMUM
15 in. [380 mm]

5/8 in.
MINIMUM
[16 mm]
6 in. [150 mm
MINIMUM
General Notes:
2. The joint configuration of a qualified groove weld procedure may be used in lieu of the groove configuration shown here.
Figure 40 — Welding Operator Qualification – Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness
7.35.3 The welding operator making a complete joint penetration procedure qualification test
meeting the requirements is thereby qualified for that process and test position for plate of
thicknesses equal to or less than the thickness of the test plate. If the test plate is 1 1/2 in. [40
mm] or over in thickness for ESW or EGW or 1 in. [25 mm] or over for all other processes, the
welding operator will be qualified for all thicknesses.
7.36 Base Metal. The base metal shall be carbon or low-alloy steel as shown in AWS B2.1 or the
7.37 Welding Procedure. The welding operator shall follow the welding procedure
specification.
7.38 Test Specimens - Number, Type, and Preparation
7.38.1 For mechanical testing, two side-bend specimens shall be cut from the test joint
approximately 4 in. [100 mm] apart, or 8 in. [200 mm] apart for electroslag and electrogas welds,
at the middle of the length of the weld prepared for testing in accordance with Figure 41.
7.38.2 Radiographic testing of the test joint may be made at the contractor's option in lieu of
the guided bend test. If radiography is used in lieu of the prescribed bend tests, the weld
reinforcement need not be ground or otherwise smoothed for inspection unless its surface
irregularities or juncture with the base metal would cause objectionable weld defects to be
obscured in the radiograph. If the backing is removed for radiography, the root shall be ground
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 114 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
flush with the base metal.
4 in. [100 mm]
17 in. [430 mm] MINIMUM
4 in. [100 mm]
4T with 4T with
6 in. [150 mm] 6 in. [150 mm]
MINIMUM MINIMUM
General Notes:
1. Root opening (R) is established by the welding procedure specification (WPS).
2. T = maximum to be welded in construction but need not exceed 1 1/2 in. [38 mm].
* Extensions do not need to be used if joint is of sufficient length to provide 17 in. [430 mm] of sound weld.
Figure 41 — Welding Operator Qualification – Electroslag and Electrogas Welded Butt

Joint
7.38.3 Method of Testing Specimens
7.38.3.1 Side Bend Specimens. Each specimen shall be bent in a jig having the contour
shown in Figures A1 through A3 from AWS B4.0/B4.0M, Standard Methods for Mechanical
Testing of Welds in accordance with those illustrations. Any convenient means may be used to
move the plunger member with relation to the die member. The specimen shall be placed on the
die member of the jig with the weld at midspan. Specimens shall be placed with that side showing
the greater defects, if any, directed toward the gap.
7.38.3.2 Radiographic Test. The radiographic procedure and technique shall be in

conformance to the requirements of 8.2.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 115 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
7.39 Test Results Required
7.39.1 Side-Bend Tests. The convex surface of the specimen shall be examined for the
appearance of cracks or other open defects. Any specimen in which a crack or other open defect
exceeding 1/8 in. [3 mm], measured in any direction, is present after the bending shall be
considered as having failed. Cracks occurring on the corners of the specimen during testing shall
not be considered.
7.39.2 For acceptable qualification, the weld, as revealed by the radiograph, shall conform to
the requirements of 8.2.4.6.
7.40 Retests. In case a welding operator fails to meet the requirements of one or more test
welds, a retest may be allowed under the following conditions:
7.40.1 An immediate retest may be made consisting of two test welds of each type failed, all
of which shall meet all the requirements specified for such welds.
7.40.2 A retest may be made, provided there is evidence that the welding operator has had
further training or practice. In this case a complete retest shall be made.
7.41 Period of Effectiveness. The welding operator's qualification specified herein shall be
considered in effect indefinitely unless (1) the welding operator is not engaged in the given
process of welding for which the welding operator is qualified for a period exceeding six months,
or (2) there is a specific reason to question the welding operator's ability.
Part E – Qualification of Tack Welders
7.43 General. The qualification tests described herein are specially devised tests to determine the
tack welder's ability to produce sound welds. It is not intended that the qualification tests be used
as a guide for welding during actual construction. The latter shall be performed in conformance
to the requirements of the procedure specification.
7.44 Limitation of Variables. For the qualification of a tack welder, these rules shall apply:
7.44.1 Qualification established with any one of the base metals of Table 6 shall be considered
as qualification to tack-weld any of the other base metals.
7.44.2 A tack welder qualified for manual shielded metal arc welding with an electrode
identified in the table below shall be considered qualified to tack weld with any other electrode in
the same group designation and with any electrode listed in a numerically lesser group
designation:
Group Designation AWS Electrode Classification*

F3 EXX10, EXX11
F1 EXX20, EXX24, EXX27, EXX28
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 116 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
* The letters "XX" used in the classification designations represent

the various strength levels in ksi (60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110 and 120
[415, 480, 550, 620, 690, 760, 830 Mpa] of electrodes
7.44.3 A tack welder qualified with an approved electrode and shielding medium combination
shall be considered qualified to tack weld with any other approved electrode and shielding
7.44.4 A tack welder shall be qualified for each process used.
7.44.5 A change in the position in which tacking is done, as defined in 7.9, shall require
qualification.
7.45 Qualification Tests Required. A tack welder shall be qualified by one test made in each
position in which the tack welding is to be performed.
7.46 Base Metal. The base metal used shall be carbon or low-alloy steel or shall comply with the
7.47 Test Specimens – Number, Type, and Preparation. The tack welder shall make a 1/4 in.
[6 mm] maximum size tack weld approximately 2 in. [50 mm] long on the fillet weld break
specimen as shown in Figure 42 using a 5/32 in. [4 mm] diameter electrode.
4 in. [100 mm] 1/2 in. [13 mm] 4 in. [100 mm]
1/2 in. [13 mm] 2 in.

[50 mm]
4 in. [100 mm]
1/2 in. [13 mm]
Figure 42 — Tack Welder Qualification – Fillet Weld Break Specimen
7.48 Method of Testing Specimens. A force shall be applied to the specimen as shown in Figure
43 until rupture occurs. The force may be applied by any convenient means. The surfaces of the
weld and of the fracture shall be examined visually for external defects.
7.49 Test Results Required.
7.49.1 The tack weld shall present a reasonably uniform appearance and shall be free of
overlap, cracks, and excessive undercut. There shall be no porosity visible on the surface of the
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 117 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
tack weld.
7.49.2 The fractured surface of

the tack weld shall show complete
penetration into the root of the
joint and shall exhibit no
incomplete fusion to the base metal
nor any inclusion or porosity larger
than 3/32 in. [2.4 mm] in the
greatest dimension.
7.49.3 A tack welder who

passes the fillet weld break test
shall be eligible to tack weld all
types of joints for the process and
in the position for which the tack
welder has been qualified.
Figure 43 — Tack Welder Qualification – Method of
Rupturing Fillet Weld Break Specimen 7.50 Retests. In case of failure to
pass the fillet weld break test, the
tack welder may make one retest without additional training.
7.51 Period of Effectiveness. A tack welder who passes the fillet weld break test shall be
considered eligible to perform tack welding indefinitely in the positions and with the processes for
which the tack welder is qualified unless there is a specific reason to question that ability. In such
case, the tack welder shall be required to again demonstrate ability to make sound tack welds by
passing the prescribed tack welding test.
8. Inspection
Inspectors responsible for acceptance or rejection of material and workmanship shall be qualified,
and the basis of inspector qualification shall be documented. If the Engineer elects to specify the
basis of inspector qualification, it shall be so stated in contract documents.
For welds subject to nondestructive testing in accordance to this section, the final acceptance may
begin immediately after the completed welds have cooled to ambient temperature. Acceptance for
ASTM A514, A517, and A709 Grade 100 and 100W steels shall be based on nondestructive
testing performed not less than 48 hours after completion of the welds.
8.1 Visual Inspection
8.1.1 General. The procedures and standards set forth in this section are to govern visual
examination of all classes of welds.
8.1.2 Personnel qualification shall be according to the following:
(1) Current or previous certification as an AWS Certified Welding Inspector (CWI) in
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 118 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
conformance to the provisions of AWS QC1, Standard and Guide for Qualification and
Certification of Welding Inspectors,
(2) Current or previous qualification by the Canadian Welding Bureau (CWB) to the
requirements of the Canadian Standard Association (CSA) Standard W178.2, Certification of
Welding Inspectors, or
(3) An engineer or technician who, by training or experience, or both, in metals fabrication,

inspection and testing, is competent to perform inspection of the work.
8.1.3 Extent of Inspection Required
8.1.3.1 All welds conforming to Joint Class I through VI of this specification shall be
visually inspected in their entirety for discontinuities given in 8.1.4(1) and listed in Table 17.
8.1.3.2 All weldments containing Joint Class I through VI welds shall be visually inspected
in their entirety for dimensional defects given in 8.1.4(2).
8.1.3.3 Visual examination for cracks in welds and base metal and other defects should be
aided by a strong light, magnifiers, or other such devices that may be helpful.
8.1.4 Visual Weld Discontinuities and Dimensional Defects. Weld discontinuities and
dimensional defects are identified as follows:
(1) Discontinuities in Welds
(a) Cracks
(b) Undercut
(c) Incomplete joint penetration
(d) Incomplete fusion
(e) Surface porosity
(f) Weld bead irregularities and profiles
(2) Dimensional Defects
(a) Incorrect joint geometry
(b) Incorrect weld size
(c) Incorrect final dimensions
8.1.5 Definition of Weld Discontinuities
8.1.5.1 Crack. A crack is a fracture-type discontinuity characterized by a sharp tip and

high ratio of length and width to opening displacement.
(1) Figure 44 illustrates the various types of weld-related cracking most of which can be
detected by visual examination.
(2) Weld metal cracks include longitudinal cracks, transverse cracks, and crater cracks.
(3) Base-metal cracks include toe cracks adjacent to weld edges and transverse cracks
extending from the weld metal into the base metal. Subsurface (underbead) cracks are not
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 119 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
detectable by visual inspection.
8.1.5.2 Undercut is a groove melted into the base metal adjacent to the weld toe or weld
root and left unfilled by weld metal as illustrated in Figure 45.
8.1.5.3 Incomplete joint penetration is a joint root condition in a groove weld in which
weld metal does not extend through the joint thickness.
Figure 44 — Cracks in Welded Joints
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 120 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Table 17
Acceptance Criteria for Visual Inspection
Extent of Visual Weld Defects Allowed
Class of Surface Porosity Weld Bead

Weld Incomplete Joint Penetration Including Piping Irregularities
(1)
Quality Cracks Undercut (Underfill), Incomplete Fusion Porosity and Profiles
Class 1 None Visually free from undercut Visually free from all evidence of The frequency of See 8.1.5 (4)
in the direction transverse inadequate joint penetration or other porosity shall not
to primary stress. 0.01 in. types of fusion defects. exceed one in 4 in. [100
[0.25 mm] maximum depth mm] of weld length,
smoothly contoured and the maximum
undercut parallel to diameter shall not
direction of primary stress. exceed 1/32 in. [1 mm].
Class II None 0.01 in. [0.25 mm] Visually free from all evidence of The frequency of Rough, irregular
maximum depth for inadequate joint penetration or other porosity shall not welds and excess
smoothly contoured types of fusion defects. exceed one in 4 in. [100 reinforcement to
undercut parallel to mm] of weld length, be ground
direction of primary stress. and the maximum smooth. (See
1/32 in. [1 mm] maximum diameter shall not Figure 45)
depth for undercut parallel exceed 1/32 in. [1 mm].
to direction of primary
stress.
Class III None 1/32 in. [1 mm] maximum 1/3T or 1/2 in. [13 mm] maximum The sum of diameters Rough, irregular
depth for undercut length incomplete penetration. Sum 1/16 in. [2 mm] or welds and excess
transverse and parallel to of all defects not to exceed 1 in. [25 greater shall not exceed reinforcement to
direction of primary stress. mm] in 12 in. [300 mm]. 1/4 in. [6 mm] in any be ground
linear inch of weld, or smooth. (See
1/2 in. [13 mm] in 12 Figure 45)
in. [300 mm] length.
Class IV None 1/32 in. [1 mm] maximum 2/3 T or 3/4 in. [19 mm] maximum The sum of diameters (See Figure 45)
depth for undercut length incomplete penetration. Sum 3/32 in. [2.4 mm] or
transverse and parallel to of all defects not to exceed 1 in. [25 greater shall not exceed
direction of primary stress. mm] in 6 in. [150 mm]. 3/8 in. [10 mm] in any
linear inch of weld, or
1/2 in. [13 mm] in 12
in. [300 mm] length.
Class V None 1/32 in. [1 mm] maximum 1 T or 1 in. [25 mm] maximum (See Figure 45)
depth for undercut length incomplete penetration. Sum
Not Applicable
transverse to direction of of all defects not to exceed 1 in. [25
primary stress. mm] in 6 in. [150 mm].
Class VI None 1/4 T or 1/16 in. [2 mm] 1 T or 1 in. [25 mm] maximum (See Figure 45)
(whichever is less) depth length incomplete penetration. Sum
when the direction is of all defects not to exceed 1 in. [25 Not Applicable
parallel to that of primary mm] in 6 in. [150 mm].
stress.
Note:
(1) Piping porosity is elongated porosity whose major dimension lies in a direction approximately normal to the weld surface. Frequently
it is referred to as “pin holes” when the porosity extends to the surface.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 121 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
General Note: Convexity (C) of a weld or individual surface bead shall not exceed the pertinent value in the following table.
Measured Leg Size or Width of Maximum

Individual Surface Bead, L Convexity
L ≤ 5/16 in. [8 mm] 1/16 in. [2 mm]
5/16 in. [8 mm] < L < 1 in. [25 mm] 1/8 in. [3 mm]
L ≥ 1 in. [25 mm] 3/16 in. [5 mm]
General Note: Reinforcement R shall not exceed 1/8 in. [3 mm]
Figure 45 — Acceptable and Unacceptable Weld Profiles
8.1.5.4 Incomplete fusion is a weld discontinuity in which fusion did not occur between
weld metal and fusion faces or adjoining weld beads.
8.1.5.5 Surface porosity is cavity-type discontinuities formed by gas entrapment during

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 122 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
solidification that are open to the surface.
8.1.5.6 Weld Bead Irregularities and Incorrect Profiles

(1) Weld bead irregularities and conditions of poor appearance include variations in
surface layer width, non-uniformity of weld ripple, and excessive weld metal spatter.
(2) Incorrect fillet weld profiles include conditions of insufficient throat, excessive
convexity, underfill, excessive undercut, overlap, and insufficient leg size as defined in Figure
45C.
(3) Incorrect groove weld profiles include conditions of excessive convexity, excessive
undercut, overlap and incomplete fusion, as defined in Figure 45E.
(4) Machining or grinding direction shall be perpendicular to the length of Joint Class I
welds.
8.1.6 Acceptable Criteria for Weld Discontinuities. All welds conforming to Joint Class I
through VI of this specification shall meet the acceptance criteria listed herein and Table 17.
8.1.6.1 The faces of fillet welds may be slightly convex, flat, or slightly concave as shown
in Figures 45A and 45B, with none of the unacceptable profiles shown in Figure 45C.
(1) Except at outside welds in corner joints, the convexity C of a weld or individual
surface bead shall not exceed the values given in Figure 45.
(2) Except for undercut, as permitted by this specification, these profile requirements do
not apply to the ends of intermittent fillet welds outside their effective length.
8.1.6.2 For Joint Class II through VI welded joints, groove welds shall preferably be made
with slight or minimum face reinforcement except as may be otherwise provided. In the case of
butt and corner joints, the face reinforcement shall not exceed 1/8 in. [3 mm] in height and shall
have gradual transition to the plane of the base metal surface (see Figure 45D.) The welds shall be
free of the discontinuities shown for butt joints in Figure 45E.
8.1.6.3 Welds shall be free from overlap.
8.1.7 Definition of Dimensional Defects
8.1.7.1 Incorrect Joint Geometry

(1) Incorrect joint geometry subject to visual inspection, generally before welding is
started, includes out-of-tolerance welding bevel or groove dimensions, base metal misalignment,
and undesirable weld joint fit-up conditions.
(2) Included in the requirements for weld joint preparation shall be inspection for removal
of scale, paint, oil, etc., from the weld joint up to a maximum 1 in. [25 mm] on each side of the
weld.
(3) Partial penetration weld joint geometry shall be visually inspected prior to welding to
assure proper weld throat dimension.
8.1.7.2 Incorrect Weld Size
(1) Incorrect weld size subject to visual inspection includes undersized fillet weld leg
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 123 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
dimensions and underfill groove weld throat dimension as defined in Figure 45.
(2) Fillet weld size shall be determined by means of a fillet weld gage.
8.1.7.3 Incorrect Final Dimensions. Incorrect final dimensions subject to visual

inspection include all conditions of dimensional inaccuracies, distortion, and lack of conformity to
drawing requirements.
8.1.8 Acceptance Criteria for Dimensional Defects
8.1.8.1 Incorrect Joint Geometry. Acceptance criteria for joint geometry shall be based
upon the specific dimensional tolerances given in the drawing requirements. In the absence of
specific weld joint geometry tolerances, any condition of the joint geometry in the opinion of the
Engineer which can reasonably be expected to produce unacceptable structural discontinuities
shall be considered incorrect joint geometry and unacceptable.
8.1.8.2 Incorrect Weld Size

(1) Fillet weld leg sizes shall conform to the following tolerances based on a measurement
of fused leg length:
(a) Weld sizes under 3/8 in. [10 mm]: -1/32 in. [1 mm], +1/8 in. [3 mm]
(b) Weld sizes 3/8 in. [10 mm] and over: -1/16 in. [2 mm], +1/8 in. [3 mm]
The average weld size of a given length shall not be less than the weld size specified on the
drawing. The average weld size is determined by the average of leg length measurements
obtained at 3 in. [75 mm] intervals along the weld length. For welds under 3 in. [75 mm] in
length, the above tolerances are applied directly.
(2) Underfill is unacceptable for groove welds in butt joints.
8.1.8.3 Incorrect Final Dimensions. Acceptability of specific dimensional conditions of

the completed weldment depends upon appearance requirements and the accuracies required for
subsequent machining, assembly, installation, or end use of the product.
8.1.9 Defect Removal and Repair. See section 9.
8.2 Radiographic Inspection
8.2.1 General. The procedures and standards set forth in this section are to govern
radiographic inspection of welded joints when such inspection is required. The methodology shall
conform to ASTM E94, Guide for Radiographic Testing, ASTM E142, Method for Controlling
Quality of Radiographic Testing, ASTM E747, Guide for Controlling Quality of Radiographic
Testing Using Wire Penetrameters, and ASTM E1032, Method for Radiographic Examination of
Weldments.
8.2.2 Personnel qualifications and records shall be in accordance with American Society for
Nondestructive Testing SNT-TC-1A, Recommended Practice, Supplement A, Radiography.
8.2.3 Extent of Inspection
8.2.3.1 Information furnished to the bidder shall identify the extent of radiographic
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 124 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
inspection to be performed by identifying the joints to be radiographed and by designating

whether complete or spot radiographs shall be made.
8.2.3.2 When complete inspection is specified, the entire length of weld in each designated
joint shall be inspected in conformance to 8.2.4.1 through 8.2.4.7.
8.2.3.3 When spot radiography is specified, the inspection and selection of the spots shall
be in conformance to 8.2.5.1 through 8.2.5.4.
8.2.4 Radiographic Examination
8.2.4.1 For welded joints that are to be radiographed, the weld ripples or weld surface
irregularities, inside and outside, shall be removed, where practical, by any suitable mechanical
process to such a degree that the resulting radiographic contrast due to any irregularities cannot
mask or be confused with the image of any indication.
8.2.4.2 The radiographic sensitivity shall be judged based on hole-type or wire image
quality indicators (IQIs). (See Figure 46 for examples of penetrameters.) Radiographic technique
and equipment shall provide sufficient sensitivity to clearly delineate the required IQIs and the
essential holes or wires as described in 8.2.4.4, Table 18 and Figures 47 through 52. Identifying
numbers shall show clearly in the radiograph.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 125 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Table 18
Standard Hole-Type and Wire Image Quality Indicator Requirements
Penetrameter
(2)
Source Side Film Side
Nominal Material Thickness Wire Wire
(1) Hole-Type Essential Hole-Type Essential
Range (T) Diameter, Diameter,
Designation Hole Designation Hole
in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm]
T ≤ 0.25 [6] 10 4T 0.008 [0.20] 10 4T 0.006 [0.15]
0.25 [6] < T ≤ 0.375 [10] 15 4T 0.010 [0.25] 12 4T 0.008 [0.20]
0.375 [10] < T ≤ 0.50 [13] 15 4T 0.013 [0.33] 15 4T 0.010 [0.25]
0.5 [13] < T ≤ 0.75 [19] 17 4T 0.016 [0.41] 17 4T 0.013 [0.33]
0.75 [19] < T ≤ 1.00 [25] 20 4T 0.020 [0.51] 20 4T 0.016 [0.41]
1.00 [25] < T ≤ 1.50 [38] 30 2T 0.025 [0.64] 25 2T 0.020 [0.51]
1.50 [38] < ≤ 2.00 [50] 35 2T 0.032 [0.81] 30 2T 0.025 [0.64]
2.00 [50] < T ≤ 2.50 [63] 40 2T 0.040 [1.02] 35 2T 0.032 [0.81]
2.50 [63] < T ≤ 4.00 [102] 50 2T 0.050 [1.27] 40 2T 0.040 [1.02]
4.00 [102] < ≤ 6.00 [152] 60 2T 0.063 [1.60] 50 2T 0.050 [1.27]
6.00 [152] < T ≤ 8.00 [203] 80 2T 0.100 [2.54] 60 2T 0.063 [1.60]
8.00 [203] < T ≤ 10.00 [254] 100 2T 0.126 [3.20] 80 2T 0.100 [2.54]
10.00 [254] < T ≤ 12.00 [305] 120 2T 0.160 [4.06] 100 2T 0.126 [3.20]
12.00 [305] < T ≤ 16.00 [406] 160 2T 0.250 [6.35] 120 2T 0.160 [4.06]
16.00 [406] < T ≤ 20.00 [508] 200 2T 0.320 [8.13] 160 2T 0.250 [6.35]
Notes:
(1) Single-wall radiographic thickness for tubular members.
(2) Applicable to tubular members only.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 126 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Figure 46 — Example of Penetrameter (Image Quality Indicator)
8.2.4.3 When weld reinforcement or backing or both, is not removed, or wire IQI
alternate placement is not used, as shown in Figures 47 through 50, shimming is required. The
total thickness of steel between the IQI and the film must be approximately equal to the average
weld thickness measured through reinforcement and backing. To ensure this, steel shims must be
placed under the IQI. The shims must extend at least 1/8 inch [3 mm] beyond three sides of the
IQI.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 127 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
3/4 in. [19 mm] minimum

3/8 in. [10 mm] minimum,
Typical
10 in. [250 mm] or greater
NOTE: ALTERNATE SOURCE SIDE IQI PLACEMENT PERMITTED

FOR TUBULAR APPLICATIONS AND OTHER APPLICATIONS
WHEN APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER.
Figure 47 — Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on

Approximately Equal Thickness Joints 10 in. [250 mm] and Greater in Length
8.2.4.4 To verify the radiographic technique employed, the following requirements shall be
met:
(1) Hole-type IQIs or wire IQIs shall show clearly on each radiograph. The minimum
number and their required locations shall be the following:
(a) For welds joining nominally equal thickness, where a radiograph represents 10 in.
[250 mm] or greater of weld length, two IQIs will be placed as shown in Figure 47. Where a
radiograph represents less than 10 in. [250 mm] of weld length, one IQI will be placed as shown
in Figure 48.
(b) For welds at transition thickness, where a radiograph represents 10 in. [250 mm]
or greater of weld length, two IQIs must be placed on the thinner of the two sections and one IQI
on the thicker section as shown in Figure 49. Figure 49 also permits an alternate IQI location for
the use of wire IQIs.
(c) When a radiograph does not show the outer edge of the weld area, an IQI must be
placed perpendicular to the joint with the smallest wire or hole on the outer edge of the inspection
area being radiographed.
(d) For circumferential welds using a single exposure, with the source of radiation
placed at the center of curvature, a minimum of three IQIs equally spaced about the circumference
are required.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 128 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc

Typical
Less than 10 in. [250 mm]


Approximately Equal Thickness Joints Less Than 10 in. [250 mm] in Length
(2) The thickness of a hole-type IQI and the essential hole or wire shall be as specified in
Table 18. A smaller essential hole or wire or a thinner hole-type IQI may be selected by the
Manufacturer, provided all other provisions for radiography are met.
Thickness shall be measured as T1 or T2, or both, at the locations shown in Figure 47
through 57 and may be increased to provide for the thickness of allowable weld reinforcement,
provided shims are used as specified in 8.2.4.3. Steel backing shall not be considered part of the
weld or reinforcement in IQI selection.
(3) Hole-type IQIs shall be manufactured from steel, preferably stainless steel, and shall
conform to dimensions shown in Figure 51. For more detailed information, see ASTM E1025,
Practice for Hole-Type Image Quality Indicators Used for Radiography. Each hole-type IQI
shall be manufactured with three holes, one of which shall be of a diameter equal to twice the
hole-type IQI thickness (2T). The diameter of the two remaining holes shall be selected by the
Manufacturer. They will ordinarily be equal to one time (1T) and four times (4T) the hole-type
IQI thickness. Hole-type IQI designations 10 through 25 shall contain a 4T hole.
(4) Wire image quality indicators (IQI) shall be manufactured in accordance with Figure
52. For more detailed information, see ASTM E747.
8.2.4.5 All radiographs shall be free from excessive artifacts, chemical or other processing
defects that could interfere with proper interpretation.
8.2.4.6 Identification markers, whose images appear on the film, shall be placed adjacent
to the weld on the part, not on the film; their locations shall be marked on the surface near the
weld in such a manner that a defect appearing on a radiograph may be accurately located and that
it is evident on the film that complete coverage of the weld has been obtained.
(1) The job identification and weld seam identification shall be indicated on each film.
(2) A complete set of radiographs for each job shall be retained by the Manufacturer and
kept on file for a period of at least five years or as required by contract.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 129 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
3/8 in. [10 mm] minimum, Typical
10 in. [250 mm] or greater


Transition Joints 10 in. [250 mm] and Greater in Length
Less than 10 in. [250 mm]

Transition Joints Less Than 10 in. [250 mm] in Length
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 130 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Figure 51 — Hole-Type Image Quality Indicator (IQI) Design
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 131 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Figure 52 — Image Quality Indicator (Wire Penetrameter)
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 132 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
15
8.2.5 Spot Radiographic Examination of Welded Joints
8.2.5.1 Minimum extent of spot radiography for welds not radiographed for their complete
length shall be as follows:
(1) One spot shall be examined in the first 50 ft. [15 m] of weld length and one spot shall
be examined for each additional 50 ft. [15 m] of weld length or fraction thereof. When identical
welds individually less than 50 ft. [15 m] of weld length, 50 ft. [15 m] increments of their total
weld length may be represented by one spot examination.
(2) Such additional spots as may be required shall be selected so an examination of the
welding of each welding operator or welder is made. Under conditions where two or more
welders or welding operators make weld layers in a joint or on the two sides of a double welded
butt joint, one spot examination may represent the work of both welders and welding operators.
(3) The locations of the spots to be examined and the time after the weld is completed
shall be agreed upon by the purchaser or his designated representative and by the fabricator.
8.2.5.2 Spot examination by radiography shall be made in conformance to 8.2.4.1 through

8.2.4.6. The minimum length of spot radiograph shall be 6 in. [150 mm]. The acceptability of
welds examined by spot radiography shall be judged by the following standards:
(1) Welds in which the radiographs show any type of crack or zone of incomplete fusion
or penetration shall be unacceptable.
(2) Welds in which the radiographs show inclusions or cavities shall be unacceptable if the
length of any such imperfection is greater than 2/3T, where T is the thickness of the thinner plate
welded. If several imperfections within these limitations exist in a line, the welds shall be judged
acceptable if the sum of the longest dimensions of all such imperfections is not more than T in a
length of 6T and if the longest imperfections considered are separated by at least 3L of acceptable
weld metal, where L is the longest imperfection. The maximum length of acceptable imperfection
shall be 3/4 in. [19 mm]. Any such imperfection shorter than 1/4 in. [6 mm] shall be acceptable
for any plate thickness.
8.2.5.3 Evaluation and Retests
(1) Where spot radiography is acceptable, the entire weld length represented by the
radiograph is acceptable.
(2) If a spot radiographed in conformance to these requirements discloses welding which
does not comply with the minimum quality requirements, two additional spots shall be taken
adjacent to the original spot, one on each side.
(a) If the additional spots examined show the welding meets the minimum quality
requirements, the entire weld, represented by the three radiographs is acceptable. The defective
weld found in the first radiograph shall be repaired and radiographically reinspected.
(b) If either of the two additional spots examined shows welding which does not
comply with the minimum quality requirements, the entire length of weld represented shall be
rejected. The entire rejected weld shall be removed and the joint shall be rewelded or, at the
15. Spot radiography, in accordance with these rules, will not ensure a predetermined quality level throughout the
product fabricated. An accepted weld, according to these spot radiography rules, may still contain defects
which might be disclosed on further examination.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 133 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
fabricator's option, the entire length of weld represented shall be completely radiographed and the
defective welding corrected.
8.2.5.4 Defect Removal & Repair. See section 9.
8.2.6 Acceptance Standards for Radiography
8.2.6.1 Scope. The standards are applicable to ferritic steels.
8.2.6.2 Terminology
(1) Rounded Indications. Indications with a maximum length of three times the width or
less on the radiograph are defined as rounded indications. These indications may be circular,
elliptical, conical, or irregular in shape and may have tails. When evaluating the size of an
indication, the tail shall be included. The indication may be from any inclusion in the weld, such
as porosity, slag, or tungsten.
(2) Aligned Indications. A sequence of four or more rounded indications shall be
considered to be aligned when they touch a line parallel to the length of the weld drawn through
the center of the two outer rounded indications.
(3) Thickness E. The thickness of the weld, E, is excluding any allowable reinforcement.
For a butt weld joining two members having different thicknesses at the weld, E is the thinner of
these two thicknesses. If a full penetration weld includes a reinforcing fillet weld, the thickness of
the throat of the fillet shall be included in E.
8.2.6.3 Acceptance Criteria. Sections of the weld shown by radiography to have any of
the following types of imperfections shall be judged unacceptable.
(1) Any type of crack or zone of incomplete fusion or incomplete joint penetration.
(2) Any elongated inclusion, such as slag, which has a length greater than 1/4 in. [6 mm]
for E up to 3/4 in. [19 mm], 1/3E for E from 3/4 to 2 1/4 in. [19 to 57 mm], 3/4 in. [19 mm] for E
over 2 1/4 in. [57 mm].
(3) Any group of inclusions in line that has an aggregate length greater than E in a weld
length 12E, except when the distance between the successive imperfections exceeds 6L, where L
is the length of the longest imperfection in the group.
(4) Rounded indications in excess of that specified by Table 19, and Figures 53 through 60
(ASTM E390, Reference Radiographs for Steel Fusion Welds may be used in lieu of these
figures).
(a) Maximum Size of Rounded Indication (see Table 19). An isolated indication is
separated from an adjacent indication by 1 in. [25 mm] or more.
(b) Aligned Rounded Indications. Aligned rounded indications are acceptable when the
summation of the diameters of the indications is less than E in a length of 12E (see Figure 53).
The length of groups of aligned groups shall meet the requirements of Figure 54.
(c) Spacing. The distance between adjacent rounded indications is not a factor in
determining acceptance or rejection, except as required for isolated indications or groups of
aligned indications.
(d) Rounded Indications Charts. The rounded indications as determined from the
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 134 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
radiographic film shall not exceed that shown in the charts. The charts in Figures 55 through 60
illustrate various types of assorted randomly dispersed and clustered rounded indications for
different weld thicknesses greater than 1/8 in. [3 mm]. These charts represent the maximum
acceptable concentration limits for rounded indications. The chart for each thickness range
represents full scale 6 in. [150 mm] radiographs, and shall not be enlarged or reduced. The
distributions shown are not necessarily the patterns that may appear on the radiographs, but are
typical of the concentration and size of indications permitted.
(e) Weld Thickness E Less than 1/8 in. [3 mm]. For E less than 1/8 in. [3 mm], the
maximum number of rounded indications shall not exceed 12 in a 6 in. [150 mm] length of weld.
A proportionally fewer number of indications shall be permitted in welds less than 6 in. [150 mm]
in length.
(f) Clustered Indications. The illustrations for clustered indications show up to four
times as many indications in a local area as that shown for random indications. The length of an
acceptable cluster shall not exceed the lesser of 1 in. [25 mm] or 2E. Where more than one cluster
is present, the sum of the lengths of the clusters shall not exceed 1 in. [25 mm] in 6 in. [150 mm]
length of weld.
(g) Image Density. Density within the image of the indication may vary and is not a
criterion for acceptance or rejection.
Figure 53 — Aligned Rounded Indications

(Reprinted by permission of ASME)
MAXIMUM GROUP LENGTH MAXIMUM GROUP SPACING

L = 1/4 in. [6 mm] for t < 3/4 in. [19 mm] 3L where L is the length of the longest
L = 1/3t for 3/4 in. [19 mm] ≤ t ≤ 2 1/4 in. [57 mm] adjacent group being evaluated.
L =3/4 in. [19 mm] for t > 2 1/4 in. [57 mm]
Figure 54 — Groups of Aligned Rounded Indications

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 135 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Table 19
(1)
Examples of Acceptable Indications
Maximum Size of Acceptable
Rounded Indication, Maximum Size
in. [mm] of Nonrelevant
Thickness t, Indication,
in. [mm] Random Isolated in. [mm]
< 1/8 [3] 1/4t 1/3t 1/10t
≥ 1/8 [3] to < 3/16 [5] 0.031 [0.8] 0.042 [1.1] 0.015 [0.4]
≥ 3/16 [5] to < 1/4 [6} 0.047 [1.2] 0.063 [1.6] 0.015 [0.4]
≥ 1/4 [6] to < 5/16 [8] 0.063 [1.6] 0.083 [2.1] 0.015 [0.4]
≥ 5/16 [8] to < 3/8 [10] 0.078 [2.0] 0.104 [2.6] 0.031 [0.8]
≥ 3/8 [10] to < 7/16 [11] 0.091 [2.3] 0.125 [3.2] 0.031 [0.8]
≥ 7/16 [11] to < 1/2 [13] 0.109 [2.8] 0.146 [3.7] 0.031 [0.8]
≥ 1/2 [13] to < 9/16 [14] 0.125 [3.2] 0.168 [4.3] 0.031 [0.8]
≥ 9/16 [14m to < 5/8 [16] 0.142 [3.6] 0.188 [4.8] 0.031 [0.8]
≥ 5/8 [16] to < 11/16 [17] 0.156 [4.0] 0.210 [5.3] 0.031 [0.8]
≥ 11/16 [17] to < 3/4 [19] 0.156 [4.0] 0.230 [5.8] 0.031 [0.8]
≥ 3/4 [19] to ≤ 2 [50] 0.156 [4.0] 0.250 [6.4] 0.031 [0.8]
>2 0.156 [4.0] 0.375 [9.5] 0.063 [1.6]
Note:
(1) This table contains examples only.
8.2.6.4 Defect Removal and Repair. See section 9.
TYPICAL CONCENTRATION AND SIZE PERMITTED IN ANY 6 in. [150 mm]

LENGTH OF WELD
1 in. 1 in.
[25 mm] [25 mm]
MAXIMUM SIZE OF INDICATIONS PER

TABLE 19 OR AS OTHERWISE NOTED
Figure 55 — Charts for Thickness E Equal to 1/8 in. [3 mm] to 1/4 in. [6 mm] Inclusive
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 136 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
TYPICAL CONCENTRATION AND SIZE PERMITTED IN ANY 6 in. [150 mm] LENGTH OF WELD.
1 in. 1 in.
[25 mm] [25 mm]

Figure 56 — Charts for Thickness E Over 1/4 in. [6 mm] to 3/8 in. [10 mm] Inclusive
1 in. 1 in.
[25 mm] [25 mm]

Figure 57 — Charts for Thickness E Over 3/8 in. [10 mm] to 3/4 in. [19 mm] Inclusive
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 137 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
1 in. 1 in.
[25 mm] [25 mm]

Figure 58 — Charts for Thickness E Over 3/4 in. [19 mm] to 2 in. [50 mm] Inclusive
1 in. 1 in.
[25 mm] [25 mm]

Figure 59 — Charts for Thickness E Over 2 in. [50 mm] to 4 in. [100 mm] Inclusive
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 138 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
1 in. 1 in.
[25 mm] [25 mm]

Figure 60 — Charts for Thickness E Over 4 in. [100 mm]

8.3 Ultrasonic Inspection
8.3.1 General. Ultrasonic examination of welded joints, where required, shall be conducted
in conformance to the procedures specified herein, which include standards for ultrasonic
acceptance or in conformance to ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 12 or Division 2,
Article 9-3, ASTM E164, and ASTM E587.
8.3.2 This procedure contains the minimum requirements for the ultrasonic inspection of butt,
corner, and T-type welded joints by the contact method and is applicable to welds in carbon and
low-alloy steels.
8.3.3 Criteria are given in Table 1 for two classes of inspection:

Class I for complete inspection of the weld where joint performance is equivalent to the base
metal under all conditions;
Class II for welds when 10 percent of the length of the weld is inspected after magnetic
particle or liquid penetrant inspection has been performed.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 139 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
8.3.4.1 Contractual specifications shall designate the class of ultrasonic inspection to be

performed by identifying the welded joints to be inspected as Class I or Class II.
8.3.4.2 When Class I welds are designated, the entire length of the weld shall be inspected.
8.3.4.3 When Class II welds are specified, the location inspected shall be a 6 in. [150 mm]
length of weld. The number of locations shall total 10 percent of the total length of the weld.
When an inspected location requires repair, two adjacent locations, one on each side, shall be
inspected also. If defects requiring repair are shown in either of these locations, the entire weld in
that joint shall be inspected.
8.3.4.4 Information furnished to the bidder shall identify the extent of ultrasonic inspection
to be performed.
8.3.5 Requirements
8.3.5.1 Operator Qualifications and Test Specifications. The ultrasonic operator shall
be thoroughly familiar with the calibration and operation of the equipment used and the inspection
requirements of this procedure. The inspector shall have demonstrated ability to calibrate and
operate the equipment in conformance to this procedure. Personnel qualifications and records
shall be in conformance to American Society for Nondestructive Testing SNT-TC-1A,
Recommended Practice, Supplement C, Ultrasonic Testing Method. Only individuals qualified
for NDT Level I, working under supervision of an individual qualified for NDT Level II, or
individuals qualified for NDT Level II or III may perform ultrasonic weld testing. Testing shall be
performed according to ASTM E164, Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of
Weldments and ASTM E587, Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Angle Beam Examination by the
Contact Method.
8.3.5.2 Equipment. The ultrasonic inspection equipment shall consist of the inspection
instrument with scan data presentation, sweep length, calibrated sensitivity, and time corrected
gain controls. The search unit and accessories shall have the following capabilities:
(1) Search Unit. The maximum dimension of the transducer active element shall not
exceed 1 in. [25 mm]. The shear wave transducer shall be fitted with a plastic wedge designed to
induce shear waves into the material to be tested at an angle of 45, 60, or 70 degrees within a
maximum tolerance of ± three degrees.
(2) Calibration Standards. Calibration standards are shown in Figures 61, 62, and 63.
Calibration reference standards shall be made from material acoustically similar to the material to
be tested. Standards such as IIW or ASTM may be used, provided the reference level sensitivity
for instrument/search unit calibration is adjusted to be the equivalent to that achieved by the
reference standard.
The following is a brief description of the calibration blocks:
(a) The 3/64 in. [1.2 mm] diameter holes are used in setting the test sensitivity level.
(b) The 1/8 in. [3 mm] diameter holes are used to check the accuracy of the refracted
angle produced by the plastic wedge.
(c) The diagonal lines mark the positions of the transducer to detect the 3/64 in. [1.2
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 140 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
mm] diameter holes.

(d) The 3/4 in. [19 mm] vertical lines mark the positions of the transducer when
calibrating for depth.
(e) The 1/4 in. [6 mm] vertical lines are used for measuring distance from the search
unit to the hole.
(f) The angle check area marks the position of the transducer when checking the
accuracy of the refracted angle produced by the plastic wedge.
Figure 61 — 70° Calibration Standard
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 141 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 142 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 143 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
8.3.5.3 Equipment Calibration

(1) Search Unit Angles. Search unit angles shall be selected as follows:
(a) For plate thicknesses 1/2 in. [13 mm] to, but not including, 1 1/2 in. [38 mm], a
wedge angle producing a 60 or 70 degree shear wave in the material to be tested shall be used.
(b) For plate thicknesses 1 1/2 in. [38 mm] to, but not including, 2 1/2 in. [57 mm], a
wedge angle producing a 45 or 60 degree shear wave in the material to be tested shall be used.
(c) For plate thicknesses 2 1/2 in. [57 mm] and over, a wedge angle producing a 45
degree shear wave in the material to be tested shall be used.
(2) Angle Check. With the transducer positioned for maximum signal response from the
1/8 in. [3 mm] diameter hole in the calibration block, the sound emission point of the transducer
shall fall on or between the two lines in the angle-check area.
(3) Flaw-Locating Device Adjustment (if used). With the sound emission point of the
transducer aligned with the 3/4 in. [19 mm] vertical line on the calibration block representing the
thickness of the weld, the flaw locating device is adjusted so that the line on the rule representing
the weld thickness is in alignment with the corresponding 1/4 in. [6 mm] line on the calibration
block.
(4) Depth Calibration. The instrument is calibrated for the range of depth to be
inspected using the large signal from the end of the block. When the emission point marked on
the transducer is aligned with one of the 3/4 in. [19 mm] vertical lines on the calibration standard,
the signal will appear on the screen at the depth for which that line is marked. A "B" (for bottom)
is marked on the screen at the depth equal to the weld thickness and a "T" (for top) is placed on
the screen at the depth equal to twice the weld thickness. See Figure 64 for typical screen
calibration.
(5) Test Sensitivity Calibration
(a) For Class I inspections, the instrument gain and attenuation correction controls
shall be adjusted to peak all signals from the 3/64 in. [1.2 mm] diameter holes within the range of
test at a minimum of 80 percent and a maximum of 95 percent of full screen height. Minor
adjustments of depth calibration should be made using the peaked signals from the holes to
compensate for slight variations in search unit angles. The screen shall be divided by two
horizontal lines at 20 percent (the disregard level or DRL) and 80 percent (the amplitude rejection
level or ARL) or full screen height.
(b) For Class II inspections, the instrument gain and attenuation correction controls
shall be adjusted to peak all signals from 3/64 in. [1.2 mm] diameter holes within the range of test
at a minimum of 80 percent and a maximum of 95 percent of full screen. Minor adjustments of
depth calibration should be made using the peaked signals from the holes to compensate for slight
variations in search unit angles. The screen shall be divided by two horizontal lines at 40 percent
(the DRL) and 80 percent (the ARL) of full screen.
8.3.5.4 Surface Preparation. All surfaces to which a search unit is applied shall be free
of loose scale, loose paint, weld spatter, grease, dirt, and any other foreign matter that might
interfere with the scanning procedure. The surface must have a contour permitting intimate
coupling between the search unit and the scanning surface.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 144 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
1/2 [13] 1 [25] 1 1/2 [25] 2 [51] 2 1/2 [64] 3 [76] 3 1/2 [89] 4 [102] 4 1/2 [114]
General Notes: Dimensions: in. [mm] except for angles.

1. Weld thickness = 1 in. [25 mm]
2. Angle is 60°
3. Depth calibration range is 1/2 in. [13 mm] to 2 in. [51 mm]
Figure 64 — Typical Screen Calibration
8.3.5.5 Test Procedure

(1) Lamination Test
(a) Before the shear wave test is conducted on welds in carbon and low-alloy steel
plates, a compressional wave test shall be performed to determine if any laminar discontinuities
are present that might interfere, unless a test for lamination has been previously conducted on the
plate material.
(b) The test shall be performed using a 1 in. [25 mm] diameter 2.25 MHz longitudinal
wave transducer. With the first back reflection from the plate adjusted to 80 percent of full screen
height, the full width of the area to be scanned by the shear wave test shall be scanned. If a
discontinuity is noted that causes a complete loss or transposition of the first back reflection, the
discontinuity shall be noted on the weld inspection report. The weld in the area of the
discontinuity cannot be reliably tested with shear waves from the side containing the discontinuity.
(2) Butt Joint Weld
(a) The entire weld volume and heat-affected zone, excluding the weld reinforcement,
shall be scanned with shear waves by directing the sound beam toward or across and along the
weld axis (see Figure 65).
(b) To detect longitudinal discontinuities in welds not ground flush, the search unit
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 145 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
shall be oscillated to the left and right with an included angle of approximately 30 degrees while
continuously scanning perpendicularly to the weld. The lateral movement advancing the search
unit along the longitudinal axis of the weld shall not exceed 75 percent of the transducer width.
The weld shall be scanned from one surface with an effective beam width on two sides or from
one side on two surfaces (see Figure 66).
The scanning area shall begin with the search unit touching the weld reinforcement and
shall include an area wide enough to ensure that the entire weld and heat-affected zone are
covered by the second half of the first skip distance.
Figure 65 — Test Procedure – Butt Joint Welds
Figure 66 — Method of Detecting Longitudinal Discontinuities in Butt Joint Welds Not

Ground Flush
(c) To detect transverse discontinuities in welds not ground flush, the search unit shall
be placed on the base-metal surface at the edge of the weld. The sound beam shall be directed by
angling the search unit toward the weld at approximately 15 degrees to the longitudinal axis of the
weld. Scanning shall be performed by moving the search unit along the weld edge from both sides
on one surface and from two opposing directions.
(d) To detect longitudinal discontinuities in welds ground flush, the search unit shall be
oscillated to the left and right with an included angle of approximately 30 degrees while
continuously scanning perpendicularly across the weld. The weld shall be scanned from one
surface on two sides of the weld when possible. Where this procedure is impossible, the weld
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 146 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
may be scanned from one side on two surfaces or from one side on one surface using at least a full
skip distance (see Figure 67). The lateral movement advancing the search unit along the
longitudinal axis of the weld shall not exceed 75 percent of the transducer width per transverse
scan.
Figure 67 — Method of Detecting Longitudinal Discontinuities in Butt Joint Welds

Ground Flush
(e) To detect transverse discontinuities in welds ground flush, the search unit shall be
oscillated to the left and right with an included angle of approximately 30 degrees while
continuously scanning along the top of the weld from two opposing directions. If the weld width
exceeds the width of the transducer, parallel scans shall be performed so that each scan overlaps
the previous scan by at least 25 percent of the transducer width. An area wide enough to ensure
coverage of the weld and heat-affected zone shall be scanned.
(3) Corner Welds
(a) The entire weld and heat-affected zone, excluding the weld reinforcement, shall be
scanned with shear waves by directing the sound beam toward or across and along the weld axis.
(b) To detect longitudinal discontinuities, the search unit shall be oscillated to the left
and right with an included angle of approximately 30 degrees while continuously scanning
perpendicularly to the weld. The lateral movement advancing the search unit along the
scan. The weld shall be tested using the first full skip distance from surface "A" as shown in
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 147 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Figure 68.
(c) To detect transverse discontinuities, the search unit shall be oscillated to the left
and right with an included angle of approximately 30 degrees while continuously scanning along
the top of the weld from two opposing directions. If the weld width exceeds the width of the
transducer, parallel scans shall be made so that each scan overlaps the previous scan by at least 25
percent of the transducer width. An area wide enough to ensure complete coverage of the weld
and heat-affected zone shall be scanned.
Figure 68 — Method for Detecting Longitudinal Discontinuities in Corner Welds Not

Ground Flush
(4) T-Joint Welds. The entire weld and heat-affected zone, excluding the weld
reinforcement, shall be scanned with shear waves. The search unit shall be oscillated to the left
and right with an included angle of approximately 30 degrees while continuously scanning
perpendicularly to the weld. The lateral movement advancing the search unit along the
scan. The weld shall be tested from surfaces "A" and "B" as shown in Figure 69, using the first
full skip distance, or from surface "C" as shown in Figure 70, using the first half skip distance.
Figure 69 — Procedure for Testing T-Joint Welds
(5) Discontinuities. If discontinuities are detected, the sound beam shall be directed to
maximize the signal amplitude. If the signal amplitude equals or exceeds the DRL, the maximum
amplitude, location, length, depth, and zone location shall be determined.
(a) To determine the length of a discontinuity, the transducer shall be positioned for
maximum signal response and moved parallel to the discontinuity axis until the signal drops
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 148 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
rapidly to the base line. The transducer is then returned to the position where the indication
began to drop rapidly to the base line. The plate is marked at the center of the transducer. This
mark shall be defined as one extremity of the discontinuity and the procedure shall be repeated in
the opposite direction to determine the other extremity.
(b) The depth of a discontinuity from the scanning surface shall be determined by the
position of the signal on the viewing screen when the signal is maximized.
(c) The zone location of a discontinuity shall be determined by observing the depth of
the signal on the screen and marking the weld at the corresponding depth on the material service.
Figure 70 — Method of Using Procedure for Testing T-Joint Welds
8.3.5.6 Acceptance Standards
(1) Class I Inspections. Any discontinuity whose reflection exceeds 80 percent of full
screen height shall be rejected. Discontinuities whose reflections equal 20 percent or greater up
to and including 80 percent of full screen height shall be evaluated as follows:
(a) If the discontinuity length exceeds T/2 (where T = thickness of the thinner
member), it shall be rejected. In no case shall any single discontinuity length exceed 1 1/2 in. [38
mm].
(b) Any two discontinuities separated by less than 2L of sound metal (where L =
length of the longest discontinuity), shall be considered a single discontinuity. The maximum
distance between the outer extremities of any two such discontinuities or the sum of their lengths,
whichever is greater, shall not exceed the length specified in 8.3.5.6(1)(a).
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 149 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
(c) If the total accumulative length of discontinuities in any 12 in. [300 mm] of weld
length exceeds 1T, that weld length shall be rejected. When less than 12 in. [300 mm] of weld is
inspected, the 1T criterion applies to the length inspected.
(2) Class II Inspections. Any discontinuity whose reflection exceeds 80 percent of full
screen height and whose length exceeds 1/4 in. [6 mm] shall be rejected. Adjacent discontinuities
whose reflections exceed 80 percent of full screen, separated by less than 2L of sound metal
(where L = length of longest discontinuity), shall be considered a single discontinuity.
Discontinuities whose reflections equal 40 percent of full screen height, up to and including 80
percent, shall be evaluated as follows:
(a) If the discontinuity length exceeds 1T (where T = thickness of the thinner
member), it shall be rejected. In no case shall any single discontinuity length exceed 2 in. [50
mm].
(b) Any two discontinuities separated by less than 2L of sound metal (where L =
length of longest discontinuity) shall be considered as a single discontinuity. The maximum
distance between the outer extremities of any two such adjacent discontinuities or the sum of their
lengths, whichever is greater, shall not exceed the length specified in 8.3.5.6.(2)(a).
(c) If the cumulative length of discontinuities in any 12 in. [300 mm] of weld exceeds
2T, that weld length shall be rejected. When less than 12 in. [300 mm] of weld is inspected, the
2T criterion applies to the length inspected.
8.3.5.7 Test Results
(1) Recording and Reporting Discontinuities
(a) The location, length, depth, maximum amplitude, and zone location of
discontinuities having a signal amplitude that equals or exceeds the DRL shall be recorded and
reported.
(b) Indications less than the DRL shall be disregarded.
(2) Record Data and Report Sheets. The ultrasonic test data and report sheets for
inspection results of welds shall contain, as a minimum, the following information:
(a) Weld identification
(b) Location
(c) Type of weld
(d) Type of material
(e) Thickness of material
(f) Joint identification
(g) Segment number
(h) Length of weld inspected
(j) Operational procedure identification
(k) Equipment used for inspection and its record of calibration. See 8.3.5.8(3).
(m) Reference block identification
(n) Inspection results
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 150 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
(p) Acceptance or rejection

(q) Signature of inspection personnel
(r) Date of test
8.3.5.8 Special Notes

(1) Supplemental ultrasonic inspection techniques that contribute to the final inspection
result shall be recorded, if used.
(2) All repaired areas, plus an additional 3 in. [75 mm] beyond each end of repair, shall be
retested as original welds and the test results shall be recorded in conformance to 8.3.5.7.
(3) The instrument shall be allowed to warm up before calibration is attempted. The
equipment shall be calibrated with the reference calibration standard each time it is used and shall
be recalibrated at least once every four hours during continuous use, whenever the electric power
to the instrument has been interrupted or whenever the calibration of the equipment is suspected
of being in error.
8.3.5.9 Defect Removal and Repair - See section 9.
8.4 Magnetic Particle Inspection
8.4.1 General. Magnetic-particle inspection of welded joints, where required, shall be

conducted in conformance to the procedures specified herein, which include standards for
acceptance.
8.4.2 Personnel qualification and records shall be in conformance to the American Society for
Nondestructive Testing SNT-TC-1A, Recommended Practice, Supplement B, Magnetic Particle.
8.4.3.1 Information furnished to the bidder shall clearly identify the extent of magnetic
particle inspection to be performed.
8.4.4 Equipment
8.4.4.1 Source of Magnetic Fields. The following magnetizing equipment shall be

capable of inducing a magnetic flux of suitable intensity in the desired direction:
(1) Prod Method
(a) Portable prod-type electrical contacts shall be spaced 3 to 8 in. [75 to 200 mm]
apart using direct current at 100 to 125 Amperes per 1 in. [25 mm] of spacing.
(b) At least two separate examinations shall be carried out using the dry particle
medium. Prods shall be placed so that the magnetizing flux during one examination is
perpendicular to the other examination direction.
(2) Coil Method
(a) Multiple coils shall be looped around the part and shall be capable of producing a
magnetic field strength of 3000 to 10,000 Ampere turns using direct current.
(b) At least two separate examinations shall be carried out using dry or wet particle
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 151 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
medium. The second examination shall be with magnetic flux at right angles to the first
examination or a different magnetic source may be used.
(c) Examination of welds by the magnetic particle method shall be made over an area
including the weld and base metal and extending at least 1/2 in. [13 mm] on each side of the weld.
(3) Yoke Method
(a) Either alternating current or permanent yokes shall be used, equivalent to a prod
method of 25 to 30 Amperes per 1 in. [25 mm] of prod spacing.
(b) At least two separate examinations shall be done using dry or wet particle medium.
The second examination shall be with the magnetic flux at right angles to the first examination.
8.4.4.2 Particle Application and Removal

(1) Dry Particles. Dry particles may be applied by means of mechanical shakers, bulb
blowers, or mechanical blowers. Excess particles shall be removed by means of a dry air current
of sufficient force to remove the excess particles which are not indicative of discontinuities.
Extreme care should be taken when removing the magnetic particles so that any particles
indicative of subsurface indications are not removed.
(2) Wet Particles. Wet particles may be applied by means of spraying or dipping per
ASTM E709, Practice for Magnetic Particle Examination.
8.4.4.3 Lighting. The weld areas shall be adequately illuminated for proper evaluation of
the indications revealed on the weld surface.
8.4.4.4 Examination Medium. The magnetic particles used for detection of defects shall
be as follows:
(1) Dry Particles. Dry particles used shall be of high permeability and low retentivity and
of such size and shape as will produce suitable indications. It is desirable that the color be such as
to provide adequate contrast with the background of the surface being examined.
(2) Wet Particles. Wet particles used shall be red or black or, alternatively, may be
fluorescent when viewed under ultraviolet illumination. The particles shall be suspended in a
suitable liquid medium in the concentration recommended by the manufacturer of the particles.
Amplified details on the use of wet particles are given in ASTM E 709, Practice for Magnetic
Particle Examination.
8.4.5 Surface Preparation
8.4.5.1 Surface Finish - Completed Surfaces. As-welded surfaces shall be considered

suitable for inspection without any grinding, provided the following conditions are met:
(1) There shall be no roll-over or undercutting and the deposited metal must be fused
smoothly and uniformly into the plate surfaces.
(2) The finished weld shall be reasonably smooth and free from irregularities, grooves or
depressions.
8.4.5.2 Precleaning. The materials or parts to be examined shall be dry and free of oil or
other foreign matter which might interfere with the formation or interpretation of magnetic
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 152 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
particle patterns or indications. Oil or grease shall be removed with petroleum distillate or
alcohol.
8.4.5.3 Application of Magnetic Field

(1) Direction. The magnetic field shall be induced in more than one direction to insure
detection of discontinuities having axes in any direction.
(2) Direct Magnetization. When using direct magnetization, direct current or half-wave
rectified alternating current shall be passed through the part being tested for a minimum of 1/5
second.
(3) Indirect Magnetization. Indirect magnetization shall be accomplished by passing
magnetizing current through an auxiliary conductor for a minimum of 1/5 second.
(4) Precaution. Care shall be taken to prevent local overheating, arcing, or burning the
surface being inspected. The magnetizing current shall not be turned on until after the prods have
been properly positioned in contact with the surface and current shall be turned off before the
prods are removed.
(5) Demagnetization. When necessary, demagnetization shall be performed.
8.4.6 Acceptance Standard
8.4.6.1 Surfaces examined by the magnetic particle method shall be free of laps, fissures,
cracks, or other defects. In-line porosity which appears as a linear accumulation of magnetic
powder shall also be removed.
8.4.6.2 Only such defects need be removed as to render the surface acceptable to the
requirements of this specification. Areas containing defects shall be ground out to remove the
defects. The ground out areas shall be reinspected to verify the complete removal of the defect.
Minor cavities resulting from the removal of shallow discontinuities shall be blended into the
surrounding area. They need not be repair welded if they do not reduce wall thickness or drawing
requirements or affect machined or gasket fits. Other defects may be repair welded by means of
the original welding procedure or an approved repair welding process. Completed repairs shall be
reinspected by the method originally used.
8.4.6.3 Defect Removal and Repair. See section 9.
8.5 Liquid Penetrant Inspection
8.5.1 Liquid penetrant inspection of welded joints, where required, shall be conducted in
conformance to the procedures specified herein, which include standards for acceptance.
8.5.2 Personnel qualification and records shall be in conformance to American Society for
Nondestructive Testing SNT-TC-1A, Recommended Practice, Supplement D, Liquid Penetrant.
8.5.3 Extent of Inspection. Information furnished to the bidder shall identify the extent of
liquid penetrant inspection to be performed.
8.5.4 Equipment
8.5.4.1 Penetrant Equipment. Aerosol cans, air or CO2, powder spray guns, paint
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 153 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
brushes, spraying, or dipping may be used to apply the liquids.
8.5.4.2 Drying Equipment. Paper towels, lint-free cloths, or vacuum equipment may be
used for drying.
8.5.4.3 Lighting. The test area shall be adequately illuminated for proper evaluation of
the visual indications revealed on the test surface.
8.5.4.4 Fluorescent Penetrants. A darkened area for black light use is necessary. The
black light intensity should be 90 to 100 foot-candles in the 3650 Angstrom wave length band.
Allow 5 minutes for the black light source to warm up to achieve the desired intensity.
8.5.5 Procedure
8.5.5.1 Temperature. The temperature of the penetrant and the part to be inspected shall
be 40° to 125°F [5° to 50°C] before application of the penetrant. When inspection is necessary
under conditions where the temperature of the penetrant or the inspection surface is outside the
40° to 125°F [5° to 50°C] range, the temperatures shall be adjusted to bring them within this
range or the procedure shall be qualified or demonstrated to the satisfaction of the customer to be
effective at other temperatures.
8.5.5.2 Surface Finish – Completed Surfaces. As-welded surfaces shall be considered

suitable for inspection without any grinding, provided all of the following conditions are met:
(1) There shall be no roll-over or undercutting, valleys or grooves along the axis of, or
within, the weld.
(2) The deposited metal must be fused smoothly and uniformly into the plate surfaces.
(3) The finished weld shall be reasonably smooth and free from irregularities, grooves, or
depressions.
8.5.5.3 Precleaning
(1) Rust, scale, slag, weld spatter, or other hard tenacious materials shall be removed by
wire brushing, grinding, or machining.
(2) All types of grinding wheels are permitted on steel.
(3) All oil and grease shall be removed with petroleum distillate or alcohol using paper
towels or lint-free cloth.
8.5.5.4 Application of Penetrant. The surface to be inspected shall be thoroughly dry

before application of the liquid penetrant. The penetrant may be applied by spraying, brushing, or
immersion. The area to be inspected shall be completely covered. The surface shall be kept wet
for a minimum of six minutes and during this period additional penetrant should be added, if
necessary, to prevent drying. Precautions should be taken to prevent inspection materials from
entering inaccessible areas. It is permissible to remove excess penetrant prior to application of the
emulsifier by wiping with paper towels or lint-free cloth.
8.5.5.5 Application of Remover. The remover shall be applied by spraying or brushing.
8.5.5.6 Removal of Excess Penetrant
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 154 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
(1) Wet Removal (Water Washable). After an emulsification time to exceed two
minutes, the penetrant-emulsified film shall be removed by a water spray. The water pressure
shall not exceed 50 psi [345 kPa] and the water temperature shall not be less than 40°F [5°C] nor
more than 110°F [45°C]. The spray shall be applied at a distance of 10 to 15 in. [250 to 400 mm]
from the surface. Washing should be continued until all traces of surface penetrant have
disappeared. Where restricted areas prevent the use of a water spray, the penetrant-emulsified
film may be removed by repeated applications of dry or water-soaked paper towels or lint-free
cloths.
(2) Dry Removal (Solvent)
(a) As much penetrant as possible shall be removed by first wiping the surface
thoroughly with a clean dry cloth or absorbent paper.
(b) The remaining excess penetrant shall be removed by wiping the surface with a
clean cloth or absorbent paper dampened with remover. Flushing of the surface with any liquid,
following application of the penetrant and prior to developing, is prohibited.
(3) Postemulsifier Removal. With postemulsifier penetrants, an additional step is
required. This step is the application of a liquid emulsifier prior to the rinsing operation. The
emulsifier may be applied by brushing, spraying, or dipping. Emulsifying times of ten seconds to
five minutes can be used, depending upon prevailing conditions, such as surface roughness or the
type of defect sought. The emulsifying time is critical. Once the emulsifying time has been set for
a particular test, it should not vary more than ±10 percent. After emulsification, the mixture is
removed by a water spray, using the same procedure as for water-washable liquid penetrants.
8.5.5.7 Application of Developer
(1) Dry. After the surface has been thoroughly dried, the developer shall be applied by
dipping, spraying, or brushing. Application of the developer by spraying is preferable. The
surface shall be completely covered with developer. It is suggested that the aerosol can or
sprayer be held 10 in. [250 mm] from the work and be applied in short dusting strokes. The
application of excessive developer should be avoided, since it is possible for a thick coating of
developer to mask indications.
(2) Liquid. The liquid developer is a suspension of powder in water or a volatile solvent.
It is applied by dipping, spraying, or brushing. In any case, a film of powder is left on the surface
when the developer dries. Where a water suspension developer is used, drying time may be
decreased by the use of warm air.
8.5.5.8 Examination. Visual examination of the surface being inspected shall be made
after a minimum of seven minutes and a maximum of thirty minutes after developer has dried.
Interpretation and acceptance shall be made according to 8.5.6.
8.5.5.9 Final Cleaning. When the inspection is concluded, the penetrant materials shall
be removed as soon as possible by means of brushing, flushing, or wiping with paper towels or
lint-free cloth.
8.5.6 Acceptance Standards. All surfaces examined shall be free of linear indications in
excess of 1/8 in. [3 mm]. These surfaces may have four or fewer, rounded indications in a line,
edge to edge, separated by 1/16 in. [2 mm], except where the specification for the material
establishes different requirements for acceptance.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 155 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
8.5.6.1 Linear indications are those indications in which the length is more than twice the
width.
8.5.6.2 Defect Removal and Repair. See Section 9.
9. Repair
9.1 Weld Repairs
9.1.1 Overlap or Excessive Convexity. Excess weld metal shall be removed.
9.1.2 Excessive Concavity of Weld or Crater and Undersize Welds. Surfaces shall be
prepared and additional weld metal deposited with the original weld procedure. All slag shall be
removed and the adjacent base metal shall be clean before additional welding.
9.1.3 Cracks in Weld or Base Metal. All cracks shall be removed (see 9.3) and the area
rewelded with the original weld procedure or a qualified repair procedure.
9.1.4 Undercutting
9.1.4.1 Undercutting may be repaired by grinding and blending or by welding. It is

preferably done by careful grinding and blending. Grinding should be performed with a pencil-
type grinder. The grinding marks should be transverse to the length of the weld, and have a 250
RMS finish or better.
9.1.4.2 Blending shall be done with a slope not to exceed 1 in 2.5. On plates of 1/2 in. [13
mm] thickness and above, up to 7 percent reduction of base material thickness is permitted.
Repair of undercut areas by grinding and blending in excess of this amount may be permitted with
the approval of the Engineer.
9.1.4.3 When undercut is to be repaired by welding, the surfaces shall be prepared and
then additional weld metal shall be deposit using the original weld procedure.
9.1.5 Incomplete Fusion, Excessive Weld Porosity or Slag Inclusions. Defective portions
shall be removed (see 9.2.3) and rewelded with the original weld procedure or a qualified repair
procedure.
9.2 Base-Metal Repairs
9.2.1 Defects in Cut Edges of Plate. If a defect is found in a cut edge that exceeds the limits
imposed in Table 20, it shall be removed and repaired in accordance with 9.3.
9.2.2 Arc Strikes and Temporary Attachment Areas. Arc strikes and temporary welds in
critical locations, as defined by the Engineer, must be removed and ground smooth to assure that
no abrupt change in section exists. The smoothed area shall be inspected by an appropriate
nondestructive testing method to assure that there are no existing cracks or similar discontinuities.
Any cracks or similar discontinuities must be repaired in accordance with 9.3.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 156 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Table 20
Limits on Acceptability and Repair of Cut Edge Discontinuities of Plate
Description of Discontinuity Repair Required
Any discontinuity 1 in. [25 mm] in length or less. None, need not be explored
Any discontinuity over 1 in. [25 mm] in length with depth over 1/8 in. [3 mm] None, but the depth should be explored(1).
maximum depth.
Any discontinuity over 1 in. [25 mm] in length with depth over 1/8 in. [3 mm] Remove, no need to reweld
but not greater than 1/4 in. [6 mm].
Any discontinuity over 1 in. [25 mm] in length with depth over 1/4 in. [6 mm] Completely remove and reweld with the original weld
but not greater than 1 in. [25 mm]. procedure or a qualified repair procedure. Aggregate
length of welding shall not exceed 20% of the length
of the plate edge being repaired.
Any discontinuity over 1 in. [25 mm] in length with depth greater than 1 in. Completely remove and reweld with the original weld
[25 mm]. procedure or a qualified repair procedure. Aggregate
length of welding shall not exceed 20% of the length
of the plate edge being repaired.
Note:
(1) A spot check of 10 percent of the discontinuities on the oxygen-cut edge in question should be explored by grinding to determine depth. If the depth of any
one of the discontinuities explored exceeds 1/8 in. [3 mm], then all of the discontinuities remaining on that edge shall be explored by grinding to determine
depth. If none of the discontinuities explored in the 10 percent spot check have a depth exceeding 1/8 in. [3 mm], then the remainder of the discontinuities
on that edge need not be explored.
9.2.3 Removal of Defective Areas. The removal of weld metal or portions of the base metal
may be done by machining, grinding, chipping, oxygen gouging, or air carbon arc gouging. It
shall be done in such a manner that the remaining weld metal or base metal is not nicked or
undercut.
9.2.3.1 Oxygen gouging shall not be used on quenched-and-tempered steel.
9.2.3.2 Defective portions of the weld shall be removed without substantial removal of the
base metal.
9.2.3.3 The surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly before welding. Defects that occur in
material handling that do not affect the structural integrity of the design can be repaired by
grinding.
9.2.3.4 Additional weld metal, when required, to compensate for any deficiency in size,
shall be deposited using a low-hydrogen process with the original weld procedure or a qualified
repair procedure.
9.2.4 Distortion and Camber. Members distorted by welding may be straightened by

mechanical means, in combination with, or by careful application of localized heat. The
temperature of the heated area shall be measured by approved methods such as temperature
indicating crayons or contact pyrometers, and limited to that permitted by the material being
straightened. For quenched and tempered, or normalized and tempered steels, the temperature
shall not exceed the tempering temperature minus 100°F [38°C], or 1200°F [650°C] for other
steels.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 157 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
9.2.5 Correction of Improperly Fitted and Welded Members. If a weld is found to be

unacceptable after additional work, or new conditions make correction of the unacceptable weld
dangerous or ineffectual, the original conditions shall be restored by removing welds or members,
or both, before the corrections are made. If this is not done, the deficiency shall be compensated
for by additional work performed according to an approved revised design. Improperly fitted and
welded members require design engineer approval prior to cutting apart. Cutting is to be handled
by methods similar to those in 9.3.
9.2.5.1 Where discontinuities such as (W), (Y), or (X) in Figure 71 are observed prior to
completing the joint, the size and shape of the discontinuity shall be determined by ultrasonic
testing. The area of the discontinuity shall be determined as the area of total loss of back
reflection, when tested in conformance to the procedure of ASTM A435, Specification for
Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels.
1 in. [25 mm]

MINIMUM
Figure 71 — Edge Discontinuities in Cut Material
9.2.5.2 For acceptance, the area of the discontinuity (or the aggregate area of multiple
discontinuities) shall not exceed 4 percent of the cut material area (length x width) with the
following exception: if the length of discontinuities on any transverse section, as measured
perpendicular to the cut material length, exceeds 20 percent of the cut material width, the 4
percent cut material area shall be reduced by the percentage amount of the width exceeding 20
percent. (For example, if a discontinuity is 30 percent of the cut material width, the area of
discontinuity cannot exceed 3.6 percent of the cut material area). The discontinuity on the cut
edge of the cut material shall be gouged out to a depth of 1 in. [25 mm] beyond its intersection
with the surface by chipping, air carbon arc gouging, or grinding, and blocked off by welding with
a low hydrogen process in layers not exceeding 1/8 in. [3 mm] in thickness.
9.2.5.3 If a discontinuity (Z), not exceeding the allowable area in 9.2.5.2 is discovered
after the joint has been completed and is determined to be 1 in. [25 mm] or more away from the
face of the weld, as measured on the cut material surface, no repair of the discontinuity is
required. If the discontinuity (Z) is less than 1 in. [25 mm] away from the face of the weld, it shall
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 158 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
be gouged out to a distance of 1 in. [25 mm] from the fusion zone of the weld by chipping, air
carbon arc back gouging, or grinding. It shall then be blocked off by welding with a low-
hydrogen process for at least four layers not exceeding 1/8 in. [3 mm] in thickness per layer.
9.2.5.4 If the area of the discontinuity (W), (X), (Y), or (Z) exceeds the allowable area in
9.2.5.2, the cut material or subcomponent shall be rejected and replaced, or repaired at the
discretion of the Engineer.
9.2.5.5 The aggregate length of weld repair shall not exceed 20 percent of the length of
the material edge without approval of the Engineer.
9.2.5.6 All repairs shall be in conformance to this specification. Backgouging of the

discontinuity may be done from either surface or edge.
9.3 Repair Procedure
9.3.1 The size of surface or subsurface defects shall be determined and documented by means
of suitable nondestructive examination. The defects shall be completely removed.
9.3.2 Prior to rewelding, these areas shall be checked by an appropriate inspection method,
such as magnetic particle or dye penetrant, to insure complete removal of defective material.
9.3.3 After rewelding in accordance with an approved repair welding procedure, the repaired
areas are to be reinspected per Section 8.
10. Postweld Treatments
10.1 Introduction
10.1.1 This section describes various postweld treatments to condition the weldment prior to
its introduction into service. These treatments are designed to do one or more of the following:
(1) Maintain dimensional stability
(2) Reduce or redistribute residual stress
(3) Improve the microstructure
(4) Improve fatigue life
(5) Improve mechanical properties
10.1.2 The residual stress reduction methods discussed in this section are thermal, peening,
and vibratory. Other postweld treatments and vibratory conditioning can be applied only with the
approval of the Engineer.
10.1.3 Residual stress reduction methods used to minimize distortion of welded components
will include, but not be limited to, those described in this section.
10.2 Thermal Residual Stress Reduction. Stresses created during the manufacture of the
welded components or which were residual in the base material may be reduced by thermal stress
reduction methods such as furnaces, portable electric resistance heaters, and other controlled heat
sources. Thermal stress reduction is a process which:
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 159 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
(1) Raises the temperature of a metal at a controlled rate to an appropriate level for the metal
(heating cycle)
(2) Maintains that elevated temperature for a specified time period (holding cycle)
(3) Lowers the temperature at a controlled rate (cooling cycle)
10.2.1 The weldment shall be adequately supported to prevent sagging during stress
reduction.
10.2.2 When two or more items are heated in a furnace at the same time, they must be spaced
so that all pieces will heat uniformly.
10.2.3 Baffles or insulating material, when needed, should be placed to protect the work from
direct impingement of heat source.
10.2.4 The temperature shall be controlled and recorded from a thermocouple(s) that have
surface contact with the welded component and are shielded from direct impingement of the heat
source. Records shall include the location and calibration, of each thermocouple, along with
traceable weldment identification such as weldment name, part number, or serial number. The
records and data shall become part of the weldment documentation.
10.2.5 Heating Cycle. The postweld heat treatment temperature shall be as specified by the
Engineer. The furnace shall not exceed 400°F [204°C] at the time the weldment is placed in it.
After the temperature of the weldment reaches 400°F [204°C], the rate of heating shall not
exceed 100°F [37°C] per hour until the weldment reaches the holding temperature. For other
heat source methods, such as portable electric pads, the rate of temperature rise shall not exceed
100°F [37°C] per hour.
10.2.6 Hold Cycle. Hold time and temperature shall be approved by the Engineer.
10.2.7 Cooling Cycle. The weldment should be cooled at a rate not exceeding 100°F [37°C]
per hour until the component reaches 300°F [149°C]. Blowers or fans shall not be used to
increase the cooling rate during the cooling cycle.
10.2.8 Steels Not Recommended for Postweld Heat Treatment (PWHT). Stress relieving
of weldments of A514, A517, A709 Grades 100 and 100W, and A710 steels is generally not
recommended. Stress relieving may be necessary for those applications where weldments must
retain dimensional stability during machining or where stress corrosion may be involved, neither
condition being unique to weldments involving A514, A517, A709 Grades 100 and 100W and
A710 steels. However, the results of notch toughness tests have shown that PWHT may actually
impair weld metal and heat-affected zone toughness, and intergranular cracking may sometimes
occur in the grain-coarsened region of the weld heat-affected zone.
10.3 Peening
10.3.1 Shot Peening. Controlled shot peening may be employed to reduce surface tensile
stresses. Controlled shot peening specifications shall apply.
10.3.2 Mechanical Peening. Hammer or needle peening may be used on intermediate weld
layers for control of shrinkage stresses in thick welds to prevent cracking. No peening shall be
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 160 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
done on the root pass. Mechanical peening of the surface layer of the weld and the base metal at
the edges of the weld is permitted for fatigue strength improvement. Controlled peening
procedures should be used to prevent overlapping or cracking of the weld or base metal. All slag
should be removed prior to hammer peening. The use of manual slag hammers, chisels and
lightweight vibrating tools for the removal of slag and spatter is permitted, but is not considered
peening.
10.3.3 Peening for Fatigue Strength Improvement. Under controlled conditions, both shot
and mechanical peening places the surface material in compression which reduces residual tensile
stresses at the weld surface, the toe of the weld and the base metal adjacent to the weld. Both
shot and mechanical peening provide for improved fatigue life in the weld joint as a result of the
16, 17, 18
surface material being placed in compression.
10.4 Vibratory Conditioning
10.4.1 Vibrational conditioning has been used successfully to provide dimensional stability on
some structures; however, the dimensional geometry, structural complexity and rigidity have a
marked effect on the success of the method employed. Vibrational conditioning after welding is
minimally effective (approximately up to 15% reduction) in reducing residual stress; but has been
found to be moderately effective during welding, to minimize distortion in mild steel weldments.
10.4.2 Vibrational conditioning of welded structures to obtain dimensional stability for

machining of the weldment may be employed with the approval of the Engineer.
10.4.3 Vibrational conditioning is not to be substituted for thermal stress relief.
16. Bremen, U., Smith, I.F.C., and Hirt, M.A..."Crack Growth Behavior in a Welded Joint Improved by Residual
Stress Method" International Conference: Fatigue of Welded Construction: Maddos, S. J. (ed), The Welding
Institute, Abington, Cambridge, 1987.
17. Booth, G. S. (ed): "Improving the Fatigue Performance of Welded Joints," The Welding Institute, Abington,
Cambridge, 1983.
18. Metal Improvement Company, Inc.: Shot Peening Application, Seventh Edition.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 161 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Nonmandatory Annexes
Annex A
Safety Considerations
(This Annex is not a part of AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, Specification for Welded Joints in
NOTE: Protect Yourself and Others From Possible Serious Injury or Death.
A1. Electric Shock. Electric shock can kill. The following are recommendations to avoid injury
caused by contact with electricity.
(1) The electrode and work (or ground) circuits are electrically "hot" when the power
source is on. Do not touch these "hot" parts with your bare skin or wet clothing. Wear
dry, hole-free gloves to insulate hands.
(2) In semiautomatic, automatic or machine welding using GTAW, GMAW, FCAW or

SAW, the electrode, electrode reel, welding head, nozzle or semiautomatic welding gun
are also electrically "hot".
(3) Insulate yourself from work or ground using dry insulation. When welding in damp
locations, on metal framework such as floors, gratings or scaffolds, and when in
positions such as sitting or lying, make certain the insulation is large enough to cover
your full area of physical contact with work and ground.
(4) Always be sure the work cable makes a good electrical connection with the metal being
welded. The connection should be as close as possible to the area being welded.
(5) Ground the work or metal to be welded to a good electrical (earth) ground.
(6) Maintain the electrode holder, work clamp, welding cable and welding machine in good,
safe operating condition. Replace damaged insulation.
(7) Never dip the electrode holder in water for cooling.
(8) Never simultaneously touch electrically "hot" parts of electrode holders connected to
two power sources because voltage between the two can be the sum of the open circuit
voltage of each power source.
(9) When working above floor level, protect yourself from a fall should you get a shock.
(10) Also see Items A4(3) and A6.
A2. Arc Radiation. Arc radiation can cause severe burns. The following recommendations are
provided to avoid exposure to arc radiation and prevent radiation burns.
(1) Use a shield with the proper filter and cover plates to protect your eyes from sparks and
the rays of the arc when welding or observing open arc welding. Headshields and filter
lenses should conform to ANSI Z87.1 standards.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 162 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
(2) Use suitable clothing made from durable flame-retardant material to protect your skin
and that of your helpers from the arc rays.
(3) Protect other nearby personnel with suitable flame-retardant screening and/or warn them
not to watch the arc nor expose themselves to the arc rays or to hot spatter or metal.
A3. Fumes and Gases. Fumes and gases can be hazardous to ones health. The following
recommendations are provided to avoid exposure to welding fumes.
(1) Welding may produce fumes and gases hazardous to health. Avoid breathing these
fumes and gases. When welding, keep your head out of the fumes generated by
welding. Use enough ventilation and/or exhaust at the arc to keep fumes and gases
away from the breathing zone. This is of particular importance when welding on
galvanized, lead or cadmium plated steel and other metals which produce either noxious
or toxic fumes.
(2) Do not weld in locations near chlorinated hydrocarbon vapors coming from degreasing,
cleaning or spraying operations. The heat and rays of the arc can react with solvent
vapors to form phosgene, a highly toxic gas, and other irritating products.
(3) Shielding gases used for arc welding can displace air and cause injury or death. Always
use enough ventilation, especially in confined areas, to insure breathing air is safe.
(4) Read and understand the manufacturer's instructions for the equipment and the
consumables to be used, including the material safety data sheet (MSDS), and follow
your employer's safety practices.
(5) Also see item A7(2).
A4. Welding Sparks. Welding sparks can cause personal injury (burns), fire, and explosions.
The following recommendations are provided to avoid injury or hazards caused by welding
sparks.
(1) Remove fire hazards from the welding area. If this is not possible, cover them to
prevent the welding sparks from starting a fire. Remember that welding sparks and hot
materials from welding can easily go through small cracks and openings to adjacent
areas. Have a fire extinguisher readily available.
(2) Where compressed gases are to be used at the job site, special precautions should be
used to prevent hazardous situations. Refer to ANSI Z49.1, Safety in Welding and
Cutting and Allied Processes, and the operating information for the equipment being
used.
(3) When not welding, make certain no part of the electrode circuit is touching the work or
ground. Accidental contact can cause overheating and create a fire hazard.
(4) Do not heat, cut or weld tanks, drums or containers until the proper steps have been
taken to ensure that such procedures will not cause substances inside to produce
flammable or toxic vapors that can cause an explosion or fires even though the vessels
appear to have been "cleaned". For information on this subject, obtain AWS F4.1,
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 163 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Recommended Safe Practices for the Preparation for Welding and Cutting of
Containers and Piping That Have Held Hazardous Substances.
(5) Vent hollow castings or containers before heating, cutting or welding. They may
explode.
(6) Sparks and spatter are thrown from the welding arc when using certain welding
processes. Wear oil-free protective garments such as leather gloves, heavy shirt, cuffless
trousers, high shoes and a cap over your hair. Wear ear plugs when welding out of
position or in confined places. Always wear safety glasses with side shields when in a
welding area.
(7) Connect the work cable to the work as close to the welding area as practical. Work
cables connected to the building framework or other locations away from the welding
area increase the possibility of the welding current passing through lifting chains, crane
cables or other alternate circuits. This can create fire hazards or overheat lifting chains
or cables until they fail.
(8) Also see item A7(3).
A5. Gas Cylinders. The following recommendations are provided for the safe use of compressed
gas cylinders.
(1) Use only compressed gas cylinders containing the correct shielding gas for the process
used and properly operating regulators designed for the gas and pressure used. All
hoses, fittings, etc. should be suitable for the application and maintained in good
condition.
(2) Inspect all cylinders for damage (damaged cylinders may explode and should be
removed from service immediately) and always store cylinders in an upright position
securely chained to an undercarriage or fixed support.
(3) Cylinders should be located:
(a) Away from areas where they may be struck or subjected to physical damage.
(b) A safe distance from arc welding or cutting operations and any other source of heat,
sparks, or flame.
(4) Never allow the electrode, electrode holder, or any other electrically "hot" parts to touch
a cylinder.
(5) Keep your head and face away from the cylinder valve outlet when opening the cylinder
valve.
(6) Valve protection caps should always be in place and hand tight except when the cylinder
is in use or connected for use.
(7) Read and follow the instructions on compressed gas cylinders, associated equipment,
and CGA publication P-1, Safe Handling of Compressed Gases in Containers, available
from the Compressed Gas Association, 1725 Jefferson Davis Highway, Suite 1004,
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 164 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Arlington, VA 22202-4102.
A6. Electrically Powered Equipment.
(1) Turn off input power using the disconnect switch at the fuse box before working on the
equipment.
(2) Install equipment in accordance with the National Electrical Code, all local codes and
the manufacturer's recommendations.
(3) Ground the equipment in accordance with the National Electrical Code and the
manufacturer's recommendations.
A7. Engine Powered Equipment.
(1) Turn the engine off before troubleshooting and maintenance work unless the
maintenance work requires it to be running.
(2) Operate engines in open, well-ventilated areas or vent the engine exhaust fumes
outdoors.
(3) Do not refuel engine powered equipment near an open flame, welding arc or when the
engine is running. Stop the engine and allow it to cool before refueling to prevent
spilled fuel from vaporizing on contact with hot engine parts and igniting. Be careful
not to spill fuel when filling tank. If fuel is spilled, wipe it up and do not start engine
until fumes have been eliminated.
(4) Keep all equipment safety guards, covers and devices in position and in good repair.
Keep hands, hair, clothing and tools away from V-belts, gears, fans and all other moving
parts when starting, operating or repairing equipment.
(5) In some cases it may be necessary to remove safety guards to perform required
maintenance. Remove guards only when necessary and replace them when the
maintenance requiring their removal is complete. Always use the greatest care when
working near moving parts.
(6) Do not put your hands near the engine fan. Do not attempt to override the governor or
idler by pushing on the throttle control rods while the engine is running.
(7) To prevent accidentally starting gasoline engines while turning the engine or welding
generator during maintenance work, disconnect the spark plug wires, distributor cap or
magneto wire as appropriate.
(8) To avoid scalding, do not remove the radiator pressure cap when the engine is hot.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 165 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Annex B
Guidelines for Preparation of Technical Inquiries
for AWS Technical Committees
(This Annex is not a part of AWS D14/D14M:200X, Specification for Welded Joints in
B1. Introduction
The AWS Board of Directors has adopted a policy whereby all official interpretations of AWS
standards will be handled in a formal manner. Under that policy, all interpretations are made by
the committee that is responsible for the standard. Official communication concerning an
interpretation is through the AWS staff member who works with that committee. The policy
requires that all requests for an interpretation be submitted in writing. Such requests will be
handled as expeditiously as possible, but due to the complexity of the work and the procedures
that must be followed, some interpretations may require considerable time.
B2. Procedure. All inquiries must be directed to:

Managing Director, Technical Services
American Welding Society
550 N. W. LeJeune Road
Miami, FL 33126
All inquiries must contain the name, address, and affiliation of the inquirer, and they must
provide enough information for the committee to fully understand the point of concern in the
inquiry. Where that point is not clearly defined, the inquiry will be returned for clarification. For
efficient handling, all inquiries should be typewritten and should also be in the format used here.
B2.1 Scope. Each inquiry must address one single provision of the Standard, unless the point
of the inquiry involves two or more interrelated provisions. That provision must be identified in
the Scope of the inquiry, along with the edition of the standard that contains the provisions or that
the Inquirer is addressing.
B2.2 Purpose of the Inquiry. The purpose of the inquiry must be stated in this portion of
the inquiry. The purpose can be either to obtain an interpretation of a Standard requirement, or to
request the revision of a particular provision in the Standard.
B2.3 Content of the Inquiry. The inquiry should be concise, yet complete, to enable the
committee to quickly and fully understand the point of the inquiry. Sketches should be used when
appropriate and all paragraphs, figures, and tables (or the Annex), which bear on the inquiry must
be cited. If the point of the inquiry is to obtain a revision of the Standard, the inquiry must
provide technical justification for that revision.
B2.4 Proposed Reply. The inquirer should, as a proposed reply, state an interpretation of the
provision that is the point of the inquiry, or the wording for a proposed revision, if that is what
inquirer seeks.
B3. Interpretation of Provisions of the Standard

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 166 3/28/2003
3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
Interpretations of provisions of the Standard are made by the relevant AWS Technical
Committee. The secretary of the committee refers all inquiries to the chairman of the particular
subcommittee that has jurisdiction over the portion of the Standard addressed by the inquiry. The
subcommittee reviews the inquiry and the proposed reply to determine what the response to the
inquiry should be. Following the subcommittee’s development of the response, the inquiry and
the response are presented to the entire committee for review and approval. Upon approval by
the committee, the interpretation will be an official interpretation of the Society, and the secretary
will transmit the response to the inquirer and to the Welding Journal for publication.
B4. Publication of Interpretations
All official interpretations will appear in the Welding Journal.
B5. Telephone Inquiries
Telephone inquiries to AWS Headquarters concerning AWS Standards should be limited to

questions of a general nature or to matters directly related to the use of the Standard. The Board
of Directors’ Policy requires that all AWS Staff members respond to a telephone request for an
official interpretation of any AWS Standard with the information that such an interpretation can
be obtained only through a written request. The Headquarters Staff can not provide consulting
services. The staff can, however, refer a caller to any of those consultants whose names are on
file at AWS Headquarters.
B6. The AWS Technical Committee
The activities of AWS Technical Committees regarding interpretations are limited strictly to
the Interpretation of provisions of Standards prepared by the Committee or to consideration of
revisions to existing provisions on the basis of new data or technology. Neither the committee
nor the Staff is in a position to offer interpretive or consulting services on: (1) specific engineering
problems; or (2) requirements of Standards applied to fabrications outside the scope of the
document or points not specifically covered by the Standard. In such cases, the inquirer should
seek assistance from a competent engineer experienced in the particular field of interest.
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 167 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc
List of AWS D14 Documents on Machinery and Equipment
Designation Title
AWS D14.1 Specification for Welding Industrial and Mill Crane and Other
Material Handling Equipment
AWS D14.3 Specification for Welding Earthmoving and Construction Equipment
AWS D14.4 Specification for Welded Joints in Machinery and Equipment
AWS D14.5 Specification for Welding of Presses and Press Components
AWS D14.6 Specification for Welding of Rotating Elements of Equipment
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 168 3/28/2003

3EA81416-39DE-1817CC.doc

Aws D14.4 2005

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aws D14.4 2005

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AWS D14.4/D14.

Supersedes ANSI/AWS D14.4-97

Under the Direction of

550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, Florida 33126

Figure Page No.

Specification for Welded Joints

1. Scope 2. Normative References

DOCUMENT SUMMARY PAGE

DOCUMENT TITLE: D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1,

Date Last Updated Initials Text Tables Figures Annex

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 3/28/2003

Key Words - Classification, equipment, AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X

Specification for Welded Joints in

Supersedes AWS D14.4-97

Under the Direction of

Approved for Publication by

AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 1 3/28/2003

Statement on Use of AWS American National Standards

International Standard Book Number: 0-87171-715-8

American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, FL 33126

© 200[Year Published] by American Welding Society. All rights reserved

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 2 3/28/2003

D. J. Landon, Chairman Vermeer Manufacturing Company

AWS D14B Subcommittee on General Design and Practices

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 3 3/28/2003

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 4 3/28/2003

4. Classification of Welded Joints

5. Welded Joint Design

Part B - Welding Procedure Qualification

Part C - Welder Qualification

Part D - Welding Operator Qualification

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 6 3/28/2003

Table of Contents (Cont'd)

Part E - Qualification of Tack Welders

10. Postweld Treatments .............................................................................................................

Annex A - Safety Considerations..............................................................................................

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 7 3/28/2003

1 Weld Inspection Requirements..............................................................................................

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 8 3/28/2003

1 Classification of Welded Joints..............................................................................................

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 9 3/28/2003

List of Figures (Cont'd)

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 10 3/28/2003

Specification for Welded Joints in Machinery and Equipment

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 11 3/28/2003

2.3 ASTM Standards3

effective weld areas

Engineer. The Engineer is the responsible technical authority.

4. Classification of Welded Joints.

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 14 3/28/2003

Radiographic (see 8.2) Magnetic-Particle Visual Inspection (see 8.1)

Figure 1 – Classification of Welded Joints

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 16 3/28/2003

Figure 1 (continued) — Classification of Welded Joints

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 17 3/28/2003

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 19 3/28/2003

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 20 3/28/2003

5. Welded Joint Design

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 22 3/28/2003

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 23 3/28/2003

AWS D14.4/D14.4M:200X, CD-1 Page 24 3/28/2003

5.2.1 Allowable Fatigue Stress. Weldments subject to repeated variations or reversals of